Image printing method and device

ABSTRACT

There are provided an image printing method and device. A print image is printed on a printing object, by relatively moving at least one of the printing object and a print head which has a plurality of dot elements arranged in a predetermined direction each for printing one pixel dot and is capable of printing a predetermined maximum number of pixel dots in the predetermined direction, in a direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction. An image having a number of pixel dots in the predetermined direction smaller in number than the predetermined maximum number of pixel dots is set to the print image. A range of use corresponding to a predetermined number of pixel dots is set to the plurality of dot elements. A printing position of the print image is adjusted in units of one or more pixel dots, as required, by moving the range of use along the predetermined direction. The print image is printed on a predetermined print area on the printing object by using dot elements in the range of use of the plurality of dot elements.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

1. Field of the Invention

This invention relates to an image printing method and device forprinting a desired print image on a predetermined print area on aprinting object by using a print head.

2. Prior Art

In general, an image printing device for printing a desired print imagecomprised of images of characters of a character string including one ormore characters, such as letters, numerals, symbols, and simple figures,arranged as image elements, allocates predetermined blank areas(margins) to respective top/bottom and left/right areas of a print areahaving a predetermined size (e.g. one page).

For instance, word processors or the like set predetermined top, bottom,left and right margins to a printing object (e.g. a printing paper offixed size (A4 or the like)), and thereby carries out printing of aprint image on a portion exclusive of these margins as a predeterminedarea. Further, when desired margins cannot be obtained due to variationsin a position at which the printing paper (printing object) is set or apaper feed mechanism, the margins are set again based on results of theprinting, for adjustment.

Further, in the word processors or the like, usually, the direction ofrunning (moving) of a print head is orthogonal to the direction offeeding of the paper, and hence the positions of the left and rightmargins are adjusted by adjusting a print start position and a print endposition along the direction of running of the print head (e.g. alongthe length of a line of a character string in horizontal writing), andthe positions of the top and bottom margins are adjusted by adjustingthe print start position and the print end position along the directionof feeding of the printing paper. That is, by adjusting the printstart/end positions through the movement control of the print head andthe feed control of the printing paper, desired margins can be obtained.

However, in a particular kind of printing apparatus, such as a tapeprinting apparatus, there is a type having a fixed print head. In such aprinting apparatus, only the print start/end positions along thedirection of feeding of the printing object (e.g. tape) can be adjustedby the feeding control, and hence only the front margin and the rearmargin (corresponding to the top and bottom margins in the case of theword processors or the like) can be adjusted but lateral margins alongthe width of the tape (corresponding to the left and right margins inthe case of the word processors or the like) cannot be adjusted.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

It is an object of the invention to provide an image printing method anddevice which prints a print image on a printing object, by moving one ofthe printing object and a print head which has a plurality of dotelements arranged thereon in a predetermined direction, relative to theother in a direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction and iscapable of adjusting a printing position in the predetermined position.

To attain the above object, according to a first aspect of theinvention, there is provided a method of printing a print image on aprinting object, by relatively moving at least one of the printingobject and a print head which has a plurality of dot elements arrangedthereon in a predetermined direction each for printing one pixel dot andis capable of printing a predetermined maximum number of pixel dots inthe predetermined direction, in a direction orthogonal to thepredetermined direction.

The method according to the first aspect of the invention ischaracterized by comprising the steps of:

setting an image having a number of pixel dots in the predetermineddirection in number smaller than the predetermined maximum number ofpixel dots to the print image:

setting a range of use corresponding to a predetermined number of pixeldots to the plurality of dot elements;

adjusting a printing position of the print image in units of one or morepixel dots, as required, by moving the range of use along thepredetermined direction; and

printing the print image on a predetermined print area on the printingobject by using dot elements in the range of use of the plurality of dotelements.

To attain the above object, according to a second aspect of theinvention, there is provided an image printing device for printing aprint image on a printing object, comprising:

a print head which has a plurality of dot elements arranged thereon in apredetermined direction each for printing one pixel dot and is capableof printing a predetermined maximum number of pixel dots in thepredetermined direction;

print image-setting means for setting an image having a number of pixeldots in the predetermined direction smaller in number than thepredetermined maximum number of pixel dots to the print image;

use range-setting means for setting a range of use corresponding to apredetermined number of pixel dots to the plurality of dot elements;

printing position-adjusting means for adjusting a printing position ofthe print image in units of one or more pixel dots, as required, bymoving the range of use along the predetermined direction;

moving means for relatively moving at least one of the print head andthe printing object, in a direction orthogonal to the predetermineddirection; and

printing means for printing the print image on a predetermined printarea on the printing object by using dot elements in the range of use ofthe plurality of dot elements.

According to the image printing method and device, a print image havinga number of pixel dots smaller than the predetermined maximum number ofpixel dots in the predetermined direction is printed on a printingobject, by using part of a plurality of dot elements, by relativelymoving at least one of the printing object and a print head which has aplurality of dot elements arranged thereon in a predetermined direction,in a direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction. Further, bymoving the range of use of the plurality of dot elements in thepredetermined direction, the printing position of the print image isadjusted in units of one or more pixel dots, as required, whereby it ispossible to print the print image on the predetermined print area on theprinting object. The adjustment of the printing position along thedirection orthogonal to the predetermined position (i.e. the directionof the relative motion) can be effected e.g. by adjusting the printstart/end positions by control of the relative motion of the print head.

Preferably, the printing object is a tape.

According to this preferred embodiment of each of the first and secondaspects of the invention, since the printing object is a tape, themethod and device can be applied to the tape printing apparatus.

Preferably, the predetermined print area is a half-die-cut label formedin the printing object by half die cutting.

According to this preferred embodiment of each of the first and secondaspects of the invention, since the predetermined print area is ahalf-die-cut label formed in the printing object by half die cutting,only by printing the print image on the half-die-cut label as thepredetermined print area and peeling off the half-die-cut label, a labelhaving a desired print image printed thereon can be formed. The positionof the half-die-cut label on the printing object has variation, andhence even if the label as the predetermined print area is displaced dueto the variation, the printing position can be adjusted in a manneraccommodating the variation.

More preferably, there are provided a plurality of kinds of labels asthe half-die-cut label, and the step of adjusting the printing positionincludes adjusting the printing position according to each kind of thelabels.

More preferably, there are provided a plurality of kinds of labels asthe half-die-cut label, and the printing position-adjusting meansadjusts the printing position according to each kind of the labels.

According to these preferred embodiments, there are provided a pluralityof kinds of labels as the half-die-cut label, and the printing positionis adjusted according to each kind of the labels. Therefore, it ispossible to adjust the printing position according to the kind of thehalf-die-cut label.

Preferably, the step of adjusting the printing position includesdesignating the printing position by an incremental or decrementalnumber of pixel dots with reference to a predetermined referenceposition corresponding to a reference number of pixel dots.

Preferably, the printing position-adjusting means includes dotposition-designating means for designating the printing position by anincremental or decremental number of pixel dots with reference to apredetermined reference position corresponding to a reference number ofpixel dots.

According to these preferred embodiments, the printing position isdesignated by an incremental or decremental number of pixel dots withreference to a predetermined reference position corresponding to areference number of pixel dots. Therefore, the adjustment can be easilyeffected. It should be noted that the predetermined reference positionmay be a predetermined fixed position, or may be the present printingposition currently configured.

Preferably, the print image is formed by converting a character code ofeach character of a character string including at least one character toimage data based on a predetermined dot font, and arranging the imagedata in a predetermined memory area.

Preferably, the image printing device includes print image-forming meansfor forming the print image by converting a character code of eachcharacter of a character string including at least one character toimage data based on a predetermined dot font, and arranging the imagedata in a predetermined memory area.

According to these preferred embodiments, the print image is formed byconverting a character code of each character of a character stringincluding at least one character to image data based on a predetermineddot font, and arranging the image data in a predetermined memory area.Therefore, it is possible to form the print image adapted to thecharacter string.

More preferably, the method includes the step of reading the characterstring from a disc storing the character string.

More preferably, the image printing device further includes readingmeans for reading the character string from a disc storing the characterstring.

According to these preferred embodiments, the character string is readfrom the disc storing the same. Therefore, it is possible to form aprint image adapted to a character string stored in a disc.

Preferably, the disc is a mini disc.

According to this preferred embodiment of each of the first and secondaspects of the invention, an image adapted to the character string readfrom the mini disc can be printed.

More preferably, the reading means includes disc playback means forreading the character string from the disc.

The image printing device according to the preferred embodiment has discplayback means for reading the character string from the disc. That is,the provision of the disc playback means makes it possible to easilyread out character groups stored in the disc as well as divert theconstruction of a disc playback device of a general type to the readingof the character groups.

More preferably, the disc playback means is constructed such that thedisc playback means receives a request signal generated in response to akey operation of a remote controller from the remote controller, andtransmits a portion of a character string to be displayed on a displayof the remote controller to the remote controller, the portioncorresponding to the request signal, and the reading means furtherincludes remote control communication means for sending the requestsignal and receiving the portion of the character string in place of theremote controller.

The aforementioned disc playback device of the general type isconstructed such that it receives a request signal generated by a keyoperation from the remote controller, and transmits a character stringin response to the request signal. Therefore, by generating the samerequest signal as generated by the remote controller for the sameprocessing, the image printing device can also obtain the same characterstring as obtained by the remote controller. That is, in this imageprinting device, the reading means has the disc playback means and theremote control communication means for transmitting the same requestsignal as generated by the remote controller and receives the characterstring, which makes it possible to obtain the character string stored inthe disc. It should be noted that by configuring the remote controlcommunication means such that it causes the remote controller togenerate a plurality of request signals by a single operation andtransmit a combination of a plurality of successive request signals tothe disc playback device, it is possible to obtain a plurality ofcharacter strings corresponding to the respective request signals by asingle operation.

The above and other objects, features, and advantages of the inventionwill become more apparent from the following detailed description takenin conjunction with the accompanying drawings.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of an appearance of a tape printingapparatus to which are applied an image printing method and deviceaccording to an embodiment of the invention, in a state in which a lidof the tape-printing apparatus is open and a tape cartridge is removedtherefrom;

FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control system of theFIG. 1 tape printing apparatus;

FIG. 3 is a perspective view of an appearance of the tape cartridge withan upper casing removed therefrom;

FIGS. 4A and 4B are diagrams showing appearances of tapes formed withhalf-die-cut labels different in type from each other;

FIGS. 5A and 5B are diagrams each of which is useful in explaining aprint image printed on a main label (a disc label and a case label);

FIG. 5C is a diagram which is useful in explaining a print image printedon a side label;

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an appearance of an mini disc (MD) cartridgeand a case thereof, which is useful in explaining the relationship amongthe cartridge, the case, the disc label, the case label and the sidelabel;

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an appearance of a conventional portable MDplayer and a remote controller connected thereto;

FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram which is useful in explaining thearrangement of a keyboard;

FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram which is useful in explaining thearrangement of a display;

FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram which is useful in explaining thearrangement of an indicator display block of the FIG. 9 display;

FIGS. 11A and 11B are diagrams each of which is useful in explaining thearrangement and control coordinates of a character display block of theFIG. 9 display;

FIGS. 12A to 12E are diagrams showing examples of images displayed on acharacter display block, together with a cursor position, which areuseful in explaining a screen display process in the FIG. 1 tapeprinting apparatus.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a conceptual representation of an overallcontrol process executed by the FIG. 1 tape printing apparatus;

FIG. 14 is a diagram which illustrates an example of a manner of sendingand receiving signals and data between the tape printing apparatus or aremote controller and the MD player during operation of the remotecontroller;

FIG. 15 is a diagram which illustrates an example of a manner of sendingand receiving signals and data between the FIG. 1 tape printingapparatus and the MD player, when the tape printing apparatus combinesrequest signals generated by operating a plurality of request keys onthe remote controller and makes successive attribute informationrequests;

FIG. 16 is a continuation of the FIG. 15 diagram;

FIG. 17 is a continuation of the FIG. 16 diagram;

FIG. 18 is a flowchart for a print data-reading process in which a disctitle requesting/storing process corresponding to FIG. 15, a musictitle-requesting preparation process corresponding to FIG. 16, and amusic title requesting/storing process corresponding to FIG. 17 arecarried out by respective subroutines which are sequentially activated;

FIG. 19 is a diagram which is useful in explaining changes in the editmode of the FIG. 1 tape printing apparatus;

FIGS. 20A and 20B are diagrams each of which is useful in explaining adisplay screen in a text-initialized state;

FIG. 20C is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayinga disc title;

FIG. 21 is a diagram which is useful in explaining an example of animage of the display screen presented when there is character data (textdata) for display, and an example of key operations carried out by theuser for deleting whole text data from the FIG. 21A state, therebyreturning to an initial state (to the basic entry mode);

FIG. 22 is a diagram which is useful in explaining an example of keyoperations carried out by the user during the print data-readingprocess, and screens displayed in accordance with the key operations;

FIG. 23 is a continuation of the FIG. 22 diagram;

FIG. 24 is a diagram which is useful in explaining an example of keyoperations carried out by the user during the printing process, and asequence of screens displayed in accordance with the key operations forpermitting the user to select the kind of label to be formed,;

FIG. 25 is a continuation of the FIG. 24 diagram;

FIG. 26 is a flowchart which is useful in explaining an in-preparationdisplay process and a during-printing display process;

FIGS. 27A and 27B are diagrams which are useful in explaining thedifference between print images formed by selecting the case label andthe disc label, respectively, as labels to be formed;

FIGS. 28A and 28B are diagrams which are useful in explaining a conceptor an idea of an elided image-forming process for forming an elidedimage by omitting characters or lines;

FIG. 29 is a diagram which is useful in explaining an example of keyoperations carried out by the user when an automatic new line-startingformat is set, and screens displayed in accordance with the keyoperations;

FIG. 30 shows a table useful in explaining the titles and meanings ofoverflow-notifying character strings (marks) as display-only charactersexclusively provided for display;

FIGS. 31A to 31D are diagrams which are useful in explaining examples ofdisplay character strings (edit information character strings) formed byusing the FIG. 30 overflow-notifying character strings (marks), anddisplay images (edit information images) formed based on the displaycharacter strings (edit information character strings);

FIG. 32A is a diagram showing an example of a display image (editinformation image) displayed on the display screen;

FIG. 32B is a diagram which is useful in explaining an example of keyoperations carried out by the user when the FIG. 32A display image (editinformation image) is displayed;

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing procedures for producing print images(edit images) based on display character strings (edit informationcharacter strings);

FIG. 34A is a diagram showing a print image formed of a mixture offull-size and half-size characters;

FIG. 34B is a diagram showing a print image formed of full-sizecharacters alone;

FIG. 35A to 35I are diagrams which are useful in explainingdisplacements of the printing position;

FIGS. 36A to 36C are diagrams which are useful in explaining therelationship between a print head and a tape;

FIGS. 37A to 37C are diagrams showing images representative of examplesof adjustment of the printing position, in which:

FIG. 37A shows a case where printing is carried out at a referenceposition;

FIG. 37B shows a case where printing is carried out after adjusting theprinting position one dot upward of the reference position;

FIG. 37C shows a case where printing is carried out after adjusting theprinting position one dot downward of the reference position;

FIGS. 38A to 38E are diagrams showing images representative of examplesof control of data to be sent to each dot element of the print head 7,when the printing position is adjusted in various ways;

FIGS. 39A and 39B are diagrams useful in explaining the range ofadjustment of the printing position;

FIG. 40A is a diagram schematically showing a position of print databefore carrying out a vertical adjustment of printing positions, whenthe main label is selected;

FIG. 40B is a diagram schematically showing an adjusted position of theprint data after carrying out the vertical adjustment of the printingposition, when the main label is selected;

FIG. 41A is a diagram schematically showing a position of print databefore carrying out a horizontal adjustment of the printing position,when the main label is selected;

FIG. 41B is a diagram schematically showing an adjusted position of theprint data after carrying out the horizontal adjustment of the printingposition, when the main label is selected;

FIG. 42A is a diagram schematically showing a position of print databefore carrying out a vertical adjustment of the printing position, whenthe side label is selected;

FIG. 42B is a diagram schematically showing an adjusted position of theprint data after carrying out the vertical adjustment of the printingposition, when the side label is selected;

FIG. 43A is a diagram schematically showing a position of print databefore carrying out a horizontal adjustment of the printing position,when the side label is selected;

FIG. 43B is a diagram schematically showing an adjusted position of theprint data after carrying out the horizontal adjustment of printingposition, when the side label is selected;

FIG. 44 is a diagram which is useful in explaining an example of keyoperations carried out by the user at a top level in the hierarchy, whenthe printing position is adjusted;

FIG. 45 is a continuation of the FIG. 44 diagram, which is useful inexplaining an example of key operations carried out by the user at afirst level under a selected option for adjustment of the printingposition;

FIG. 46 is a continuation of the FIG. 45 diagram, which is useful inexplaining an example of key operations carried out by the user at asecond level under the option selected for adjustment of the printingposition;

FIG. 47 is a flowchart for a side label presence/absence detection &horizontal printing position adjustment process;

FIG. 48A is a diagram showing an appearance of a tape cartridge asviewed from a bottom side, which holds a tape T for use in producing amain label LM;

FIG. 48B is a diagram showing an appearance of a tape cartridge asviewed from a bottom side, which holds a tape T for producing a sidelabel LS;

FIG. 49A is a perspective view of the compartment of the tape printingapparatus in which the FIGS. 48A and 48B tape cartridge is inserted, andcomponent parts in the vicinity thereof;

FIG. 49B is a plan view of the compartment of the tape printingapparatus in which the FIGS. 48A and 48B tape cartridge is inserted, andcomponent parts in the vicinity thereof;

FIG. 50 is a diagram which is useful in explaining a format of aregister (internal configuration register) for setting processingformats;

FIGS. 51A to 51C are diagrams which are useful in explaining details ofsome of the FIG. 50 processing formats;

FIG. 52 is a diagram which is useful in explaining a format of charactercode data;

FIGS. 53A to 53C are diagrams which are useful in explaining details ofthe FIG. 52 format;

FIG. 54 is a diagram which is useful in explaining an example of keyoperations carried out by the user during execution of Kana/Kanjiconversion, and a sequence of screens displayed in accordance with thekey operations;

FIG. 55 is a diagram which is useful in explaining an example of keyoperations carried out by the user during execution of Katakana/Hiraganaconversion, and a sequence of screens displayed in accordance with thekey operations;

FIG. 56 is a flowchart for procedures of operations carried out in theKana/Kanji conversion mode;

FIG. 57 is a diagram which is useful in explaining an example of keyoperations carried out by the user during execution of character entry,and screens displayed in accordance with the operations;

FIG. 58 is a diagram which is useful in explaining an example of keyoperations carried out by the user when the kind of characters isselected during execution of the FIG. 57 character entry, and a sequenceof screens displayed in accordance with the operations;

FIG. 59 is a diagram which is useful in schematically explaining anexample of key operations carried out by the user from the start of thecharacter entry to the end thereof, and a sequence of screens displayedin accordance with the operations;

FIGS. 60A and 60B are diagrams useful in explaining a selection screenfor selecting characters, divided into five display areas forcontrolling the same.

FIG. 60C is a diagram showing display-only characters displayed in oneof the FIGS. 60A and 60B display areas;

FIG. 61 shows a Hiragana array table as an example of an array table forarranging a predetermined kind of characters;

FIG. 62 is a diagram which is useful in explaining a scroll rule forchanging an entry designation character through a manner of operation ofa cursor, based on the FIG. 61 Kana array table;

FIG. 63 is a diagram similar to FIG. 62, which is useful in explaining ascroll rule for changing the entry designation character through anothermanner of operation of the cursor;

FIG. 64 is a diagram similar to FIG. 62, which is useful in explaining ascroll rule for the changing entry designation characters through stillanother manner of operating the cursor;

FIG. 65 is a diagram similar to FIG. 62, which is useful in explaining ascroll rule for changing the entry designation character through stillanother manner of operating the cursor;

FIG. 66 is a diagram similar to FIG. 62, which is useful in explaining ascroll rule for changing the entry designation character through stillanother manner of operating the cursor;

FIG. 67 is a diagram similar to FIG. 62, which is useful in explaining ascroll rule for changing the entry designation character through stillanother manner of operating the cursor;

FIG. 68 shows a Katakana array table as an example of the array tablefor arranging the predetermined kind of characters;

FIG. 69 shows an array table of alphanumeric characters as an example ofthe array table;

FIG. 70 shows a numeral array table as an example of the array table;

FIG. 71 shows a Kanji array table as an example of the array table;

FIG. 72 shows a symbol array table as an example of the array table;

FIG. 73 shows a symbol array table as a variation of the FIG. 72 arraytable;

FIG. 74 shows a symbol array table as another variation of the FIG. 72array table;

FIG. 75 shows a table classifying symbol groups for use in a symbolselection/entry mode;

FIG. 76 shows a character-code table for showing an example ofcharacters that can be entered when “” (music) is selected as a symbolgroup in FIG. 75;

FIG. 77 shows a character-code table showing an example of charactersthat can be entered when “z,2 ” (description) is selected as a symbolgroup in FIG. 75; and

FIG. 78 shows a character-code table showing an example of charactersthat can be entered when “” (omission) is selected as a symbol group inFIG. 75.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

The invention will now be described in detail with reference to drawingsshowing an embodiment thereof. In this embodiment, an image printingmethod and device according to the invention is applied to a tapeprinting apparatus.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of an appearance of the tape printingapparatus with a lid thereof opened, and FIG. 2 is a block diagramshowing the configuration of a control system of the FIG. 1 tapeprinting apparatus.

Referring to FIG. 1, the tape printing apparatus 1 includes a casing 2having upper and lower divisional portions. The casing 2 includes akeyboard 3 arranged on the top of the front portion thereof, a display 4arranged on the front surface at a location upward of the right side ofthe keyboard 3, a lid 21 arranged on the top of the rear portionthereof, and a lid-opening button 23 provided in front of the lid 21 foropening the same. The keyboard 3 is comprised of various kinds of entrykeys.

Referring to FIG. 2, the tape printing apparatus 1 is basicallycomprised of an operating block 11 having the keyboard 3 and the display4 for interfacing with the user, a printer block 12 having a print head7 and a tape feeder block 120 for printing on a tape T contained in atape cartridge 5 loaded in a compartment 6, a cutter block 13 forcutting off the printed portion of the tape T, a sensor block 14 havingvarious sensors for carrying out various detecting operations, a drivingblock 270 having drivers for driving respective circuits associatedtherewith, a power supply block 290, and a control block 200 forcontrolling operations of components of the tape printing apparatus 1including the sensors and drivers.

To implement the above construction, the casing 2 accommodates a circuitboard, not shown, in addition to the printer block 12, the cutter block13, the sensor block 14 and so forth. On the circuit board are mounted apower supply block 290 and the circuits of the driving block 270 and thecontrol block 200. The power supply block 290 has a power supply unit EUconnected to a connector port 24 for connecting an AC adapter thereto,and batteries E, such as nicad batteries, which can be removably mountedwithin the casing 2 from outside. The power supply unit EU suppliespower to components of the tape printing apparatus 1 including thesensors and drivers.

In the tape printing apparatus 1, after loading the tape cartridge 5 inthe compartment 6, the user enters and edits desired characters(letters, numerals, symbols, simple figures, etc.) or the like andinputs instructions via the keyboard 3, while checking or viewing theresults of the entry, editing and instructing operations on the display4. For instance, when the user instructs a printing operation via thekeyboard 3, the tape feeder block 120 unwinds a tape T from the tapecartridge 5, while the print head 7 prints on the tape T as desired. Theprinted portion of the tape T is delivered from the tape exit 22 as theprinting proceeds. When the desired printing operation is completed, thetape feeder block 120 sends the tape T to a location corresponding totermination of a predetermined tape length (the predetermined length ofa label to be formed), and then stops the feeding of the tape.

It should be noted that in the above and following descriptions, data(items) representative of character information are collectivelydescribed as character data (items) or simply as characters, and when itis considered preferable to explicitly show that a character data (item)is text code data (item), the data (item) is described as character codedata (item) or simply as a character code, whereas when it is consideredpreferable to explicitly show that a character data (item) is an image(dot matrix pattern or its synonym, bit map), the data (item) isreferred to as a character image data (item) or simply as a characterimage.

In other words, usually, it is obvious that a character data item inputvia the keyboard 3, for instance, is a character code, and a characterdata item displayed as character information based on the character codeis a character image data item. Further, when data of a character imageis arranged in a display image-forming area of memory to form a displayimage, for instance, to form a display image by generating pixel dots ofeach character image by converting a character code based on an outlinefont or the like and arranging the dots in the display image-formingarea (in short, converting a character code to a corresponding image),and to form a display image by arranging character image data based on adot (bit map) font corresponding to a character code or a registered dotmatrix (arranging a character image), can be considered substantiallythe same things or operations in respect of forming a display image byarranging data (character data) representative of character information,except when the difference matters in description.

Therefore, a character code data item (or a character code) and acharacter image data item (or a character image) are discriminated fromeach other only when it is considered particularly preferable todiscriminate one from the other. Otherwise, data items representative ofcharacter information are indiscriminately described as character dataitems (or characters).

Referring again to FIGS. 1 and 2, under the lid 21, the printer block 12has the compartment 6 for loading the tape cartridge 5 therein. The tapecartridge 5 is mounted in or removed from the compartment 6 when the lid21 is open. Further, the casing 2 has a left side portion thereof formedwith a tape exit 22 which communicates between the compartment 6 and theoutside of the apparatus. On the tape exit 22 faces a tape cutter 132for cutting a dispensed portion of the tape T.

Referring to FIG. 3, the tape cartridge 5 has a cartridge casing 51formed of an upper casing 51 a and a lower casing 51 b. A tape reel 52around which the tape T having a predetermined width (approximately 4 to52 mm: approximately the size of a side label to the size of a caselabel, both of which are described hereinafter) is wound, a ribbonsupply reel 53 around which an ink ribbon R is wound, and a ribbontake-up reel 54 for taking up used part of the ink ribbon R therearoundare rotatably arranged within the cartridge casing 51. At a locationfacing a passageway where the tape T and the ink ribbon R are placed oneupon the other, there is formed a hollow chamber 55 without a bottom.

Further, the upper casing 51 a has an inflated portion 57 facing thehollow chamber 55, formed such that the print head 7 and a platen 62does not abut the upper casing 51 a from inside. The inflated portion 57is formed with a platen-fitting hole 58 and a head-fitting hole 59, forfitting an upper end of the shaft of the platen 62 and an upper end of ahead-supporting shaft 65 therein, respectively, when the tape cartridge5 is loaded in the compartment 6.

On the other hand, in the compartment 6, there are arranged a head unit61 incorporating the print head 7, such as a thermal head, and theplaten 62. When the tape cartridge 5 is loaded in the compartment 6, thehead unit 61 and the platen 62 are inserted into the hollow chamber 55in a manner sandwiching the tape T and the ink ribbon R therebetween.Similarly, a guide bar 64 and a take-up reel drive shaft 63 are insertedinto a central hole of the tape reel 52 and a central hole of the ribbontake-up reel 54, respectively.

When the platen 62 and the take-up reel drive shaft 63 are driven forrotation by a feed motor 121 as a drive source, the tape T and the inkribbon R are fed or advanced. More specifically, when the tape T isrolled out from the tape reel 52, the ink ribbon R is also rolled outfrom the ribbon supply reel 53 and fed or run together with the tape Tin a state lying upon the tape T, followed by being taken up by theribbon take-up reel 54. At the same time, the print head 7 is driven insynchronism with running of the tape T and the ink ribbon R to therebycarry out a printing operation. The printed portion of the tape T is fedfrom a tape-sending slit 56 formed in the lower casing 51 b toward thetape exit 22 of the casing 2. Further, after completion of the printingoperation, the tape T continues to be fed until a predetermined cuttingposition on the tape T reaches the position of the tape cutter 132.

The cutter block 13 includes the tape cutter 132, a cutting button 133for being manually operated to cause the tape cutter 132 to carry out amanual cutting operation, and a cutter motor 131 for driving the tapecutter 132 for an automatic cutting operation. To selectively carry outone of these two types of cutting operations, the tape printingapparatus 1 is constructed to permit the use to switch the mode betweenan automatic cutting mode and a manual cutting mode.

More specifically, in the manual cutting mode, when the printingoperation is completed, the user pushes the cutting button 133 arrangedon the casing 2, whereby the tape cutter 132 is actuated to cut the tapeT to a desired length. Further, in the automatic cutting mode, aftercompletion of the printing operation, the tape T is automatically sentfor incremental feed by a predetermined length, and then stopped,whereupon the cutter motor 131 is driven to cut off the tape T.

The tape T is a laminate of a base tape having a printing surface as onesurface and an adhesive treated surface as the other surface, and apeel-off paper covering the adhesive treated surface of the base tape.There are provided a plurality of types of tape T, and the tapecartridge 5 for holding the tape T includes various types havingrespective slightly different shapes according to the types of tape T(some types of tape cartridge 5 have a plurality of small holes andrecesses formed in the bottom thereof, while others do not have thesame).

As shown in FIGS. 4A and 4B, for instance, some types of tape T comprisea base tape having label portions formed by half die cutting(hereinafter, label portions formed as such are referred to as“half-die-cut labels”). The half-die-cut labels are for use inaffixation to a disc cartridge (MD cartridge) containing a mini disc(MD) or a disc case (MD case) for storing the MD cartridge. Thus,according to the tape printing apparatus 1, the tape cartridge 5 holdingany of the above-mentioned types of tape T is loaded in the apparatus 1to print on the tape T, and simply by peeling half-die-cut labelsprinted with characters off the tape T, it is possible to easily formdesired labels, which can be easily affixed to predetermined locationson the disc cartridge and the disc case.

As shown in FIG. 6, an MD 92 having a standard size of 64 mm (2.5inches) in diameter (see FIG. 7) is held in an MD cartridge 91 which isreceived in an MD case 93 for storage.

To the top surface of the MD cartridge 91, for instance, it is possibleto affix a main label LM printed as shown in FIG. 5A. The main label LMis also referred to as a “disc label LMD” when it is discriminated froma “case label LMC” described hereinbelow. To the top surface of the MDcase 93, it is possible to affix two main labels LM formed as shown inFIG. 5B. If a unitary label having a size corresponding to a total sizeof two successive main labels LM is used for these main labels, it isreferred to as the case label LMC. Further, even a set of two mainlabels LM is also referred to as the “case label LMC” when it isdiscriminated from the above-mentioned disc labels LMD. To a sidesurface of the MD cartridge 91 or the MD case 93, it is possible toaffix a label (side label) LS as shown in FIG. 5C.

The main label LM (disc label LMD) includes various types different insize, including the largest type having a size of approximately 36 mm×52mm, and the smallest type having a size of approximately 36 mm×18 mm.The side label LS has a size of approximately 4 mm×60 mm. Further, thecase label LMC has a size of approximately 52 mm×72 mm. As the caselabel LMC, the above-mentioned unitary label or the set of two disclabels LMD (main labels) may be affixed.

In printing on portions of “TITLE” appearing in FIGS. 5A and 5B and theside label LS, usually, the disc title (attribute information) of an MD(disc) 92 to which the printed labels are affixed is used. This isbecause the disc title represents the contents of main information(music) stored in the MD (disc) 92 most accurately. Further, numbers,such as 1, 2, 3 and the like, appearing in the figures represent maininformation numbers (music numbers). For instance, they correspond totrack numbers in the MD 92 and corresponding capital letters, such as“AAAAA”, designate main information titles (music titles) stored in thetrack. Images of labels shown in these figures represent music numbersand corresponding music titles printed such that each music number isfollowed by a corresponding music title on the same line.

It should be noted that conventionally, the MD records pieces of musicor music information as main information. Further, managementinformation formed of text data (text code data) and other textinformation is recorded as attribute information concerning the maininformation. The management information includes a music number, thestarting and ending addresses of a music piece, and a date of recordingof the music piece, which are automatically recorded when the musicpiece is recorded, and a date of recording a disc title automaticallyrecorded when the disc title is recorded. Further, the above other textinformation contains disc titles and music titles entered by the user.

Alphanumeric characters and the like are easy to process even in halfsize (as half-size characters), since they have simpler characterconstructions (character images) than ideographic characters, such asChinese letters and Japanese Kanji letters, and hence they are generallyprocessed as half-size characters (half-size display characters) bytaking into account display efficiency per unit area, functions of adisplay, etc. On the other hand, ideographic characters, such as Kanjiletters, and symbols are generally processed in full size, i.e.displayed as full-size characters (full-size display characters), sincethey have complicated character constructions (character images). In thecase of a Japanese language-adapted type of the tape printing apparatus1 of the present embodiment which is capable of processing Japaneselanguage, Kana letters (Hiragana letters and Katakana letters)representative of the Japanese syllabary are processed (displayed orprinted) as half-size characters, while Kanji letters are processed(displayed or printed) as full-size characters. It should be noted thatas defined by JIS B0191, a “half-size character” is a character having acharacter area whose size in the direction of reading (in the directionof width) is half the size in the same direction of a character area ofa “full-size character” of which height-to-width ratio is approximately1:1. The height-to-width ratio of the character area of a “half-sizecharacter” is, therefore, approximately 1:0.5.

Therefore, in the MD, there are separately provided an area for storingattribute information (hereinafter referred to as “half-size displayattribute information”) represented by character data (hereinafterreferred to as “half-size display attribute data”) formed of onlyhalf-size display characters, such as alphanumeric characters and thelike, and an area for storing attribute information (hereinafterreferred to as “full-size display attribute information”) represented bycharacter data (hereinafter referred to as “full-size display attributedata”) including data of full-size display characters, such as Kanjiletters and the like. Normally, only one of the above areas is used.When full-size display characters, such as Kanji letters and the like,are employed, if the displayed characters are reflected i. e. printed onlabels as they are, it is possible to create labels which are easy toview or read.

Further, the attribute information sometimes includes the total numberof music pieces automatically input by an MD player (or arbitrarilyentered by the user), the recording (play) time of each music piece, thenames of artists (names of composers or the like) in addition to theabove-mentioned kinds of attribute information. Small letters “aaaaa . .. ” added after the capital letters “AAAAA” as a music title as shown inFIG. 5B represent the name of an artist (name of a composer or thelike). A comment of a phrase “˜XX OTHER TITLES˜” appearing in FIGS. 5Aand 5B expresses information obtained from the total number of musicpieces (of course, a phrase “˜A TOTAL OF XX TITLES˜” may be used inplace thereof).

Conventionally, the above-mentioned attribute information (the totalnumber of music pieces, a disc title, music numbers, music titles, playtimes, recording dates, artist names, etc.) is used as displayinformation displayed on the display of an MD playback system (MDplayer) or a remote controller.

Referring to FIG. 7, conventionally, an MD cartridge 91 (containing anMD 92) is loaded, e.g. in a portable MD player 90, and keys of asystem-operating block 914 of the MD player 90 are operated, whereby itis possible to play back music pieces stored in the MD 92 as well asdisplay the above various kinds of attribute information on a systemdisplay 912.

Further, forms of the above-mentioned labels are conventionally providedas accessories of the MD 92, and, for instance, each user manuallywrites on the labels with reference to character data (display data) ofattribute information displayed on the system display 912 when the MDplayer 90 plays back the MD 92, and then affixes them to respectivepredetermined portions of the MD cartridge 91 and the MD case 93.

Further, some conventional MD playback systems send and receive data toand from a remote controller by remote control communication means(including wired and wireless ones), and particularly, there is a typefor use with a display-equipped remote controller. For instance, the MDplayer 90 shown in FIG. 7 belongs to this type. The connector (orconnection plug) of a remote control connection cable 925 from a remotecontroller 921 is inserted into the remote control terminal 901 of theMD player 90, and keys of a remote controller-operating block 923 areoperated, whereby music pieces recorded in the MD 92 can be played backand at the same time attribute information can be displayed on a remotecontroller display 922. The user can manually write on the labels withreference to the attribute information thus displayed.

However, this conventional method of making labels for MD's is verytroublesome, and it is almost impossible to manually write lots ofcharacters within a label which is small in size. What is more, to makeseveral types of labels has the problem that it demands much patience.

In contrast, as described above with reference to FIGS. 4A and 4B, thetape printing apparatus 1 according to the embodiment of the inventionmakes it possible to easily form desired labels which can be affixed topredetermined locations, only by loading the tape cartridge 5 holdingthe tape T formed with half-die-cut labels therein for printing on thetape T, and peeling the half-die-cut labels printed with characters offthe tape T.

Although in the examples shown in FIGS. 4A and 4B, the tapes T formedwith different labels of a plurality of types, that is, the tape Tformed with half-die-cut labels for making main labels LM (disc labelsLMD) and the tape T formed with half-die-cut labels for making sidelabels LS are shown as separate tapes T, one type of tape T may beformed with different half-die-cut labels suitable for making respectivetypes of labels (that is, for making disc labels LMD and side labelsLS). Further, it is possible to provide a tape T for making case labelsLMC.

To this end, for the tape printing apparatus 1, there are providedseveral kinds of tape cartridges 5 respectively holding the above tapesT which range in size from a side label-forming tape T having a width ofapproximately 4 mm to a case label-forming tape having a width ofapproximately 52 mm, and a tape T without half-die-cut labels thereon.

In the following, description will be mainly made of cases of forminglabels. Since minimum two types of tape T, that is, a tape T for formingmain labels LM and a tape T for forming side labels LS are required forproviding necessary labels for MD's, let it be assumed for clarity ofdescription that there are provided only the two types of tape T shownin FIGS. 4A and 4B. In the FIG. 4A tape T, a main label LM having awidth of 36 mm is defined within the range of a tape width Tw of 46 mm,while in the FIG. 4B tape T, two side labels LS each having a width of 4mm are defined within the range of a tape width Tw of 20 mm.

Further, a print width in the direction of the width of the tape T overwhich the print head 7 can print characters is set to 36 mm (288 dotswhen 0.125 mm/dot) in a manner adapted to the widths of the labels LMand LS defined as above on the tapes T (see FIGS. 39A and 39B). When themain label LM is printed, a portion having a print width of 32 mmexclusive of margins in the direction of the width of the tape T isused. Although the print head 7 is required to have a size appropriatefor a print width of approximately 56 mm when it is used to form a caselabel LMC as a unitary label, and only a size appropriate for a printwidth of 4 mm when it is dedicatedly used to make side labels, thefollowing description will be made assuming that the print head 7 of 288dots is used in the present embodiment, which can be most generallyemployed and at the same time designed relatively compact.

On the other hand, as described above, the tape cartridge 5 includesvarious types constructed to have slightly different shapes in a mannercorresponding to respective types of tape T contained therein so as toenable the user to discriminate between the types of tape T which varywith the width, the kind of half-die-cut label defined thereon, and soforth, from a different shape of each type of tape cartridge 5. To thisend, a tape-discriminating sensor 141 comprised e.g. of a micro-switchis arranged in the compartment 6, for detecting the different shape ofeach cartridge to thereby determine the type of tape T containedtherein.

Further, similarly to the tapes T shown in FIGS. 4A and 4B, each tape Thas reference holes TH formed at predetermined space intervals, and atape position sensor 143 which is comprised of a photo interrupter orthe like is arranged in the vicinity of the tape exit 22 (see FIG. 1),i.e., in the vicinity of the tape cutter 132, for detecting thereference holes TH, thereby enabling detection of the position of thetape T (particularly the printing position thereof).

Furthermore, a mechanism for opening/closing of the lid 21 includes alid opening/closing sensor 142 which is comprised of a limit switch andthe like for detecting the opening or closing of the lid 21, whereby itis possible to detect an abnormality e.g. of the lid 21 being openedduring printing.

As shown in FIG. 2, the sensor block 14 has not only thetape-discriminating sensor 141, the lid opening/closing sensor 142 andthe tape position sensor 143 but also a voltage sensor 144 connected tothe power supply unit EU of the power supply block 290 supplying powerto components of the tape printing apparatus 1, for detecting a changein electric potential thereof. It should be noted that sensors otherthan the above, such as an ambient temperature sensor, a head surfacetemperature sensor and the like can be added to the apparatus, or someof the above sensors can be omitted therefrom, so as to suit thepractical conditions under which the apparatus is used.

The driving block 270 includes a display driver 271, a head driver 272,and a motor driver 273.

The display driver 271 drives the display 4 of the operating block 11 inresponse to control signals delivered from the control block 200, i.e.in accordance with commands carried by the signals. Similarly, the headdriver 272 drives the print head 7 of the printer block 12 in accordancewith commands from the control block 200.

Further, the motor driver 273 has a feed motor driver 273 d for drivingthe feed motor 121 of the printer block 12 and a cutter motor driver 273c for driving the cutter motor 131 of the cutter block 13, andsimilarly, drives each motor in accordance with commands from thecontrol block 200.

The operating block 11 includes the keyboard 3 and the display 4.Referring to FIG. 8, the keyboard 3 has a power key 31, a shift key 32,and four cursor keys 33 (33U, 33D, 33L and 33R) for moving a cursor(actually, for scrolling the display range of a print image on thedisplay screen 41) in respective upward (↑), downward (↓) leftward (←)and rightward (→) directions (hereinafter the cursor keys will bereferred to as “the up arrow key 33U”, “the down arrow key 33D”, “theleft arrow key 33L” and “the right arrow key 33R”, whereas whencollectively called, they are referred to as “the cursor key 33”). Thekeyboard 3 has eight function keys as well.

More specifically, on the upper side of the top of the keyboard 3, thereis arranged a function key group 34 including a character decoration key(hereinafter referred to as “the decoration key) 34F, a character entrykey (hereinafter referred to as “the character key”) 34C, afigure/symbol entry key (hereinafter referred to as “the symbol key”)34D mainly for use in entry, editing and decoration of each character(letter, numeral, symbol, figure, etc.), as well as a delete/cancel key(hereinafter referred to as “the delete key”) 35. On the lower side ofthe top of the keyboard 3, there are arranged a read key 36, aconversion/space key (hereinafter referred to as “the conversion keys”)37, an enter key 38, and a print key 39.

FIG. 8 is a diagram schematically showing the arrangement of keys on thekeyboard 3. Although the arrangement of each key is slightly differentin relative position from the actual arrangement thereof (see FIG. 1),the keys are shown in an approximately identical arrangement to theactual arrangement thereof. Further, name(s) and functions (some areshown by using callouts) of keys appearing in FIG. 8 are printed on thetop surface of the FIG. 1 keyboard 3.

If the decoration key 34F, the character key 34C, symbol key 34D, thedelete key 35, the read key 36 or the conversion key 37 are eachoperated in combination with the shift key 32 (i.e. by depressing thekey while depressing the shift key 32), they serve as a format key 34FS(the shift key 32+the decoration key 34F: to reflect the state of thedecoration key 34F being used in combination with the shift key 32,hereinafter referred to as “the format key 34FS” by adding analphabetical letter “S” to the reference numeral, and the same appliesto the other keys), a frame key 34CS, an adjustment key 34DS, an allcharacter delete key 35S, a line read key 36S and a conversion mode key37S.

Further, the above each cursor key 33 is sometimes employed incombination with the shift key 32, and hence, for instance, the state ofthe up arrow key 33U and the shift key 32 being simultaneously operatedis referred to as “the shift/up arrow key 33US”, whereas when operationof any of the cursor key 33 in combination with the shift key 32 iscollectively referred to as “the shift key 33S”.

Although dedicated keys may be exclusively provided for the above keyentries, the size of the keyboard 3 dominantly determines the whole sizeof the tape printing apparatus 1, so that to design the apparatuscompact in size, the number of keys having required functions isdecreased by using keys in combination with the shift key 32.

Referring to FIG. 9, the display 4 has a display screen 41 which iscomprised of an LCD and provides therein an indicator display block 4 iwhich is capable of lighting eighteen indicators, and a characterdisplay block 4 c formed of a dot matrix of (horizontal) 72×(vertical)16 dots.

The indicator display block 4 i is provided for indicating variousprinting modes and states of the tape printing apparatus 1 for printingcharacter data (text data: see FIGS. 5A to 5C) of titles and musictitles, by state of each indicator being lighted or not lighted. Theindicator display block 4 i has eight upper indicators 4 i 00 to 4 i 07shown in FIG. 10 indicating information concerning a title (disc title),eight lower indicators 4 i 10 to 4 i 17 indicating informationconcerning music titles, two right-hand side indicators 4 iL and 4 iRindicating that all music titles cannot be printed on a main label LM(disc label LMD or case label LMC), that is, lines to be printed withthe music titles are overflowed (line overflow).

Referring to FIGS. 11A and 11B, the character display block 4 c has twobasic units of control, i.e. two forms of display to be controlled. Oneof the two forms of display is a full-size/half-size display shown inFIG. 11A. In this form of display, the character display block 4 c isdivided into two control blocks; a sub-display block at a left end,indicated by coordinates CE and CF in the figure, for displaying twoimages each in a 8×8 dot matrix, and a main display block for displayingeight images each in a 8×16 dot matrix. The sub-display block is usedfor displaying music numbers, referred to hereinafter, or the like,while the main display block is used for displaying general characterdata other than the music numbers or the like.

The other form of display is a 6×8 display shown in FIG. 11B. In thisform of display, the character display block 4 c is controlled in unitsof 6×8 dot matrices as explicitly represented by the name of 6×8display, that is, by dividing the display block into twelve upperdot-matrix areas indicated by coordinates A0 to Ab and twelve lowerdot-matrix areas indicated by coordinates B0 to Bb, i.e. a total oftwenty-four dot-matrix areas. This form of display is for use in specialdisplay carried out by a code display block (for displaying JIS codesfor an MD system), e.g. when characters are input.

During the screen display process of the tape printing apparatus 1, acursor K for instructing a display range or an editing position(position for inserting character, for instance) is fixed to the rightend of the coordinates C5 of the above main display block, as shown inFIGS. 12A to 12E.

FIG. 12A schematically shows the main display block divided intocharacter display areas indicated by respective schematicrepresentations of coordinate values, while FIGS. 12B to 12E show a casewhere only full-size display characters are displayed, a case where onlyhalf-size display characters are displayed, a case where full-size andhalf-size display characters are displayed in a mixed manner with thecursor K being positioned on the right side of a full-size displaycharacter, and a case where full-size and half-size display charactersare displayed in a mixed manner, with the cursor K being positioned onthe right side of a half-size display character, respectively. In thesecases, the display range is scrolled by operating the cursor key 33. Forinstance, when the right arrow key 33R is depressed, charactersdisplayed are moved leftward, that is, the display range is shiftedrightward.

Referring to FIG. 2, contents (instructions and data items) which theuser input via the keyboard 3 while viewing the results of the entry areoutput to the control block 200.

The control block 200 includes a CPU 210, a ROM 220, a charactergenerator ROM (CG-ROM) 230, a RAM 240, and a peripheral control circuit(P-CON) 250, all of which are connected to each other by an internal bus260.

The ROM 220 has a control program area 221 for storing control programsexecuted by the CPU 210, and a control data area 222 for storing controldata including e.g. a Kana-Kanji conversion table (dictionary) in thecase of the Japanese language-adapted type of the tape printingapparatus 1 which is capable of processing Japanese language, a colorconversion table, a letter modification table and the like.

The CG-ROM 230 stores font data, i.e. data defining letters, symbols,figures and the like, provided for the tape printing apparatus 1. Whencode data indicative of a specific character or the like is inputthereto, it outputs the corresponding font data.

The RAM 240 is backed up such that stored data items can be preservedeven when the power is turned off by operating the power key 321. TheRAM 240 includes areas of a register group 241, a text data area 242, adisplay image data area 243, a print image data area 244, a half-sizedisplay attribute data area 245, a full-size display attribute data area246, as well as a conversion buffer area 247 including a colorconversion buffer. The RAM 240 is used as a work area for carrying outthe control process.

The P-CON 250 incorporates logic circuits for complementing the functionof the CPU 210 as well as handling interface signals for interfacingwith peripheral circuits and the MD player 90. The logic circuits arecomprised of gate arrays, custom LSIs, etc. For instance, a timer (TIM)251 as time-measuring means and a remote control communication controlcircuit (RC) 252 are also incorporated in the P-CON 250 for realizingother functions thereof.

The P-CON 250 is connected to the sensors of the sensor block 14, andthe keyboard 3, for receiving signals generated by the sensor block 14as well as commands and data entered via the keyboard 3, and inputtingthese to the internal bus 260 as they are or after processing them.Further, the P-CON 250 cooperates with the CPU 210 for outputting dataand control signals input to the internal bus 260 by the CPU 210 or thelike to the driving block 270 as they are or after processing them.

Further, the P-CON 250 is connected to the MD player 90 in a remotelycontrollable manner via the remote control interface terminal (RT) 25 ofthe tape printing apparatus 1, a remote control connection cable 26having a connector (or connection plug) connected to the RT 25, and theremote control terminal 901 of the MD player 90, and cooperates with theCPU 210 for carrying out remote control communication, describedhereinbelow.

The CPU 210 of the control block 200 receives signals and data fromcomponents of the tape printing apparatus 1 and the MD player 90 byusing the P-CON 250 according to the control program read from the ROM220, processes font data from the CG-ROM 230 and various data stored inthe RAM 240, and delivers signals and data to the components of the tapeprinting apparatus 1 and the MD player 90, to thereby carry out positioncontrol during printing operations, the display control of the displayscreen 41, and the remote control communication control, as well ascause the print head 7 to carry out printing on the tape T underpredetermined printing conditions. In short, the CPU 210 controls theoverall operation of the tape printing apparatus 1.

Next, the overall control process carried out by the tape printingapparatus 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 13. As shown in thefigure, when the power key 31 is depressed (to turn on the power of thetape printing apparatus 1) to start the program for carrying out thecontrol process, first, at step S1, initialization of the systemincluding restoration of saved control flags is carried out to restorethe tape printing apparatus 1 to the state it was in before the powerwas turned off the last time. Then, the image that was displayed on thedisplay screen 41 before the power was turned off the last time (screenG0 in FIG. 20B, screen G11 in FIG. 21 or the like) is displayed as theinitial screen at step S2.

The following steps in FIG. 13, that is, step S3 for determining whetheror not a key entry has been made, and step S4 for carrying out aninterrupt handling operation are conceptual representations of actualoperations. Actually, when the initial screen has been displayed at stepS2, the tape printing apparatus 1 enables an interrupt by key entry(keyboard interrupt), and maintains the key entry wait state (No to S3)until a keyboard interrupt is generated. When the keyboard interrupt isgenerated (Yes to S3), a corresponding interrupt handling routine isexecuted at step S4, and after the interrupt handling routine isterminated, the key entry wait state is again enabled and maintained (Noto S3).

As described above, in the tape printing apparatus 1, main processingoperations executed by the apparatus are carried out by task interrupthandling routines, and hence if print image data required to be printedis available, the user can print the image data at a desired time, bydepressing the print key 39 to generate an interrupt handling routinetherefor and thereby start a printing process for carrying out aprinting operation. In short, operating procedures up to the printingoperation can be selectively carried out by the user as he desires.

Now, a manner or procedure of sending and receiving data between aremote controller (for instance, the remote controller 921 describedabove with reference to FIG. 7) and the MD player 90 (during remotecontrol communication) by operating the remote controller will bedescribed by way of example.

For instance, as shown in FIG. 14, when the user operates a key forrequesting desired attribute information (hereinafter, operating the keyis provisionally described as depressing the “request key”), a requestprocess (Q10) as an interrupt handling routine is activated and startedby the remote controller 921. First, a request signal RQ1 is generatedto send the same (Q101).

When the MD player 90 receives the request signal RQ1, a responseprocess responsive to the request is activated and started by the MDplayer 90 to carry out the response process (P10 and P101), and responsedata RP1 for answering the request RQ1 is sent out (P102) (although theresponse is sometimes made by a control signal alone, here, “responsedata” is used to mean such a control signal as well).

When the response data RP1 is received (Q102), it is determined by theremote controller 921 (Q103) whether or not the received response dataRP1 is data requested, i.e. desired response data responsive to therequest signal RQ1. In this case, there is provided identification data(of one byte, for instance) at a head of one sending/receiving data unit(e.g. a packet) of the response data, and the received response data RP1is identified by using the identification data, whereby it is determinedwhether or not the received response data RP1 is the data requested.

When the response data RP1 is different from the data requested (No toQ103), another response data RP1 is requested (Q101). On the other hand,when the received response data RP1 is the data requested (Yes to Q103),the request process is terminated (Q106), followed by the programproceeding to next processes in which received data is stored in apredetermined area or displayed. Of course, these processes (the storageprocess and the display process) may be included in the preset processto carry out before terminating the request process.

However, in the above case, in the MD player 90, if there are responsedata items to be sent successively, the response data RP1 is set to afirst response data RP1, for instance, and then a second response dataRP2, a third response data RP3, . . . , and a k-th (k represents anumber) response data RPk are sequentially sent out (P104 and P105).

In the remote controller 921, when the first response data RP1 isdifferent from the data requested (No to Q103), the first response dataRP1 is ignored and another data is requested (Q101), so that the secondresponse data RP2 is also ignored, whereas when the first response dataRP1 is the data requested (Yes to Q103), the second response data RP2,the third response data RP3, . . . , and the k-th response data RPk arereceived, followed by terminating the request process (Q104 to Q106).

As described above, the remote controller 921 is configured such thatrequest signals can be generated in response to the operated request keyto send the same, while the MD player 90 is configured such thatresponse data responsive to the request signals can be sent out (inreply). Therefore, if the tape printing apparatus 1 is also providedwith the same request key and means associated therewith as those of theremote controller 921 to carry out the same request key process, theapparatus can perform the same function as that of the remote controller921.

It should be noted that the MD player 90 contemplated in the presentembodiment may be of a type which is different from the MD playerdescribed above with reference to FIG. 7, that is, which has only partof various request keys in the system-operating block 914 or which doesnot have a system display 912, so long as the player is capable ofdisplaying various attribute information on the remote controllerdisplay 922 by operating keys of the remote controller 921. Further,although the following description is made of cases wherein wired remotecontrol communication is carried out for convenience of description,this is not limitative, but only by using infrared (optical) or FMcarrier wave communication in place of the wired communication, thepresent invention can be applied to wireless remote controlcommunication.

Now, the MD player 90 described here by way of example is a kind of MDplayer commercially available, which has, as the above types of requestkeys, a play key (PLAY key), a rewind key (REWIND key: hereinaftersimply referred to as “the REW key”), a stop key (STOP key), a pause key(PAUSE key), a play-mode key (PLAY-MODE key) (hereinafter simplyreferred to as “the P-MOD key”), and a display key (DISPLAY key)(hereinafter simply referred to as “the DISP key”). In short, the remotecontroller is provided with the above request keys for causing the MDplayer to perform its functions.

Further, the MD 92 loaded in this MD player 90 stores information(including both half-size display attribute information and full-sizedisplay attribute information) of one music piece per one track witheach track number and music number identical in number with each other.

The PLAY key has the function of playing back MD's and further, if itcontinues to be depressed for a predetermined time period, it canactivate the function of a fast forward key (i.e. send a fast forwardrequest signal as a request signal). When playback is requested, the MDplayer 90 starts a playback process in response thereto, and sends thenumber and title of a requested music piece to the remote controllerduring playback, whereas when fast forward is requested, the MD player90 sequentially outputs a track number (music number) and acorresponding music title whenever fast forward is requested. That is,the user can proceed to playback of a next music piece and display ofthe number and title thereof by fast forward without waiting for eachinformation to be reproduced as music information.

Although the above music title (attribute information, displayinformation) includes both of a music title (half-size display musictitle) represented by half-size display attribute data and a music title(full-size display music title) represented by full-size displayattribute data, the remote controller according to this embodimentselects and displays a predetermined one of the half-size and full-sizedisplay music titles (the conventional one displays only a half-sizedisplay music title).

The REW key is a request key for requesting character data (attributeinformation: character data of the track number (music number) and musictitle) of a music piece being reproduced, or alternatively characterdata of a music piece reproduced in immediately preceding playback,depending on the state of the MD player 90 at a time point of depressingthe REW key. When the REW key is repeatedly operated, the MD player 90sequentially outputs track numbers (music numbers) and correspondingmusic titles similarly to the case of the PLAY key being depressed butin a reverse direction (in a direction of smaller music numbers). TheSTOP key is a request key for requesting stoppage of playback and thePAUSE key is a request key for requesting pause or temporary stop ofplayback.

The P-MOD key is a request key for sequentially switching modes(playback modes) during playback to a normal playback mode, a playbackmode for repeating all the music pieces, a playback mode for repeatingone music piece, and a playback mode for playing back music pieces atrandom.

Further, the DISP key is a request key for switching display modes ofthe display block of the remote controller for selection. The displaymode is sequentially switched to a music number display mode fordisplaying a music title (or a music number+a music title: sometimes,additional information, such as an artist's name and the like, isfurther included. In the following, for simplicity of the description,it is assumed that a music number+a music title are displayed), a disctitle display mode for displaying a disc title (or the total number ofmusic pieces+a disc title: hereinafter, it is assumed that the totalnumber of music pieces+a disc title are displayed), a time display modefor displaying a time, a play time display mode for displaying a playtime (performance time), and again, the music number display mode, thedisc title display mode, and so forth.

Although the above disc title (attribute information, displayinformation) includes both of one represented by half-size displayattribute data (half-size display disc title) and one represented byfull-size display attribute data (full-size display disc title), theremote controller selects and displays a predetermined one of thehalf-size and full-size display disc titles (conventionally only ahalf-size display disc title is displayed).

The MD player 90 is configured such that it can send (in reply) responsedata in response to each request signal generated by operating each ofthe above keys, so that if the tape printing apparatus 1 is providedwith the same request keys as those of the remote controller forcarrying out similar processes, the tape printing apparatus 1 is capableof performing the same function as that of the remote controller.

Further, it is also possible to generate request signals by operating aplurality of request keys on the remote controller and combine therequest signals so as to request a continuous set of attributeinformation of the MD player 90. More specifically, by operating a newlyprovided key or an existing one for which programs are modified forprocessing, it is also possible to make a desired combination ofrequests for attribute information. For instance, it is also possible torequest music titles of an arbitrary number of music pieces based on adisc title and a desired music number.

Therefore, the tape printing apparatus 1 is provided with the read key36 described hereinbefore with reference to FIG. 8 as the request keydescribed above. In the following, a process for successively requestingattribute information will be described.

As shown in FIG. 15, when the user depresses the read key 36, similarlyto the case of FIG. 14, a print data-reading process (Q20) as aninterrupt handling routine is activated and started in the tape printingapparatus 1, and first, a DISP key signal is generated as a requestsignal RQ21 to send the same to the MD player (Q201).

When the request signal RQ21 is received, the display mode of the MDplayer 90 is changed in response to the request (P201), and characterdata (attribute information, display information) corresponding to thedisplay mode is sent as response data RP21 (P202).

When the response data RP21 as character data is received (Q202), it isdetermined by the tape printing apparatus 1 whether or not the responsedata RP21 is desired data, i.e. disc title display data (Q203).

For instance, if the request signal RQ21 was sent (Q201) when the MDplayer 90 was in the disc title display mode, the display mode ischanged (P201) to the time display mode, so that the response data RP21in this case is character data for displaying a time. Further, if therequest signal RQ21 was sent (Q201) when the MD player 90 was in thetime display mode, the response data RP21 is character data fordisplaying a play time. Similarly, if the MD player 90 was in the playtime display mode, the response data RP21 is character data fordisplaying a music title (a music number+a music title).

In the above cases, since each character data is not a desired disctitle display data (character data of the total number of music pieces+adisc title) (No to Q203), attribute information is requested again(Q201). Further, as described above, in the these cases as well, theidentification data arranged at the head of the response data RP21 isused to determine whether or not the received response data RP1 is datadesired.

On the other hand, if the request signal RQ21 was sent (Q201) when theMD player 90 was in the music title display mode, the display mode ischanged (P201) to set the MD player 90 to the disc title display mode,so that the response data RP21 in this case is character data (of thetotal number of music pieces+a disc title) for displaying the disctitle.

In this case, the received character data is the desired disc titledisplay data (Yes to Q203), so that in the tape printing apparatus 1,the received character data is stored in a predetermined area as thecharacter data (of the total number of music pieces+a disc title) fordisplaying the disc title (Q204), followed by the program proceeding toa next process (Q205).

The character data of the disc title (attribute information, displayinformation) in this case also includes character data items of ahalf-size display disc title and a full-size display disc title, andhence, the character data items of both the display disc titles aresuccessively sent in response to a single request signal. Therefore, inthe tape printing apparatus 1, differently from the case of the remotecontroller, the character data items of the two kinds of display disctitles are stored in respective storage areas in the RAM 240, that is,in respective disc title-storage areas of the half-size displayattribute data area 245 and the full-size display attribute data area246 in the RAM 240 (Q204).

Further, when the above character data items are stored (Q204), there isa case where a lack of one or both of the character data items occurs(where there is empty data), or there is a case where invalid data iscontained in the character data items, so that flags or the like fordisplaying the status of the character data items are provided forstoring the status thereof.

For instance, by providing e.g. a half-size display disc title flag anda full-size display disc title flag, the status of the character data ofa disc title is stored in the following manner: when character dataitems for displaying a half-size display disc title and as a full-sizedisplay disc title are included in the character data received, acombination of flag statuses [half-size display disc title flag,full-size display disc title flag]=[1, 1] is set, and if only acharacter data item for displaying one of the display disc titles isincluded, a combination of flag statuses [half-size display disc titleflag, full-size display disc title flag]=[1, 0] or [0, 1] is set,whereas if there is not included any character data item for displayingthe display disc titles in the received character data, a combination offlag statuses [half-size display disc title flag, full-size display disctitle flag] =[0, 0] is set. Similarly, when invalid data is included, itis possible to provide corresponding flags to store the status of thecharacter data received. In the above manner, the status of characterdata read in is determined by using flags or the like, thereby enablinga subsequent step to be selected with ease according to the user'sselection or to suit a subsequent process (read process).

After completing storage of the disc title (the total number of musicpieces+the disc title)(Q204 and Q205), next, as shown in FIG. 16, a DISPkey signal is generated as a request signal RQ26 by the tape printingapparatus 1 to send the same to the MD player 90 (Q206). Then, the samesending/receiving operations and the same determination operations asdescribed above with reference to FIG. 15 are carried out (Q206, P206,P207, Q207 and Q208). When desired music title display data is received(Yes to Q208), next, a predetermined music number (track number) (Q209)and a predetermined count of music pieces (Q210) are set.

In this case, as the predetermined music number, there may be set amusic number which can be automatically detected and set, such as musicnumber 1, the music number of a music piece played the last time, or themusic number of a music piece next thereto. Alternatively, the user mayset the predetermined music number as desired by providing some settingmeans for setting the music number through key operation. Further, asthe predetermined count of music pieces, there may be set a value whichcan be automatically set, such as a value of the total number of musicpieces obtained together with a disc title described above withreference to FIG. 15, or a value which the user sets as desired. In thefollowing, a case will be described by way of example, in which themusic numbers of all music pieces (e.g. 20 pieces) starting from musicnumber 1 are set, that is, the predetermined music number I=1 and thepredetermined count of music pieces J=20 are set.

When the predetermined music number I=1 and the predetermined count ofmusic pieces J=20 are set to the first music number i=1 (=I) and thenumber or count of remaining music pieces j=20 (=J), respectively (Q209and Q210), the program in the tape printing apparatus 1 proceeds to anext process (Q211). Then, as shown in FIG. 17, a signal (i.e. fastforward request signal) to be generated in response to a continuousdepression of the play key is generated as a request signal RQ2C andsent to the MD player 90 (Q212).

When the request signal RQ2C is received, in the MD player 90, aplayback track number (i.e. a music number) is incremented by one asprocessing responsive to the request (P212), and character data(attribute information, display information) of the track number (musicnumber) is sent as first response data RP2C1 (P213), followed by sendingcharacter data of a music title stored in the track as second responsedata RP2C2 (P215).

When first character data (music number) is received as the firstresponse data RP2C1 (Q213), it is determined by the tape printingapparatus 1 (Q214) whether or not the received music number is a desiredmusic number i (first, i=1). If it is not the desired music number i (Noto Q214), another request is made (Q212), whereas when it is the desiredmusic number i (Yes to Q214), next, second character data (music title)is received as the second response data RP2C2 Q215) to store the firstcharacter data and the second character data as data of a musictitle(music number+music title) in a predetermined area (Q216).

The character data of the music title (music number+music title:attribute information, display information) in this case also includescharacter data items of a half-size display music title and a full-sizedisplay music title, and in the tape printing apparatus 1, similarly tothe case of the disc title described above, the character data items oftwo kinds of each display music title are stored in the half-sizedisplay attribute data area 245 and the full-size display attribute dataarea 246 in the RAM 240, respectively (Q216).

Further, the status of data items of all the music pieces including thefollowing music pieces described hereinafter, is stored by using flagssimilar to those described above with reference to the disc title (forinstance, a half-size display music title flag indicative of inclusionof a half-size display music title in the received data items, afull-size display music title flag indicative of inclusion of afull-size display music title in the same, a half-size music titleinvalid data flag indicative of inclusion of invalid data in thereceived half-size music titles, a full-size music title invalid dataflag indicative of inclusion of invalid data in the received full-sizemusic titles, a half-size music title empty data flag indicative ofinclusion of empty data in the received half-size music titles, afull-size music title empty data flag indicative of inclusion of emptydata in the received full-size music titles, etc.). This makes it easyto determine the status of character data read in at the following steps(Q216).

When character data of the first music title (music number 1 and a musictitle corresponding thereto) has been stored (Q216), then, it isdetermined (Q217) whether or not the predetermined number of musicpieces have already been stored. That is, it is determined whether ornot the number of remaining music pieces j≦1 holds. At this time pointof the present process, only the first music title (of the music numberi=1) has been stored (j=20) (No to Q217), so that, then, the musicnumber i is incremented by one to update the desired music number i=2(=1+1), while the number of remaining music pieces j is decremented byone to update the number or count of remaining music pieces j=19 (=20−1)(Q218).

Thereafter, the same processes as described above (Q212, P212, P213,Q213, Q214, P215, Q215 and Q216) are carried out using the desired musicnumber i=2 and the number or count of remaining music pieces j=19. Whencharacter data of a next music title (music number 2 and a music titlecorresponding thereto) has been stored (Q216), next, it is determinedwhether or not the predetermined number of music pieces have been stored(whether or not the number of remaining music pieces j≦1 holds). Then,the music number i is incremented by one to update the desired musicnumber i=3 (=2+1), while the number of music pieces j is decremented byone to update the number or count of remaining music pieces j=18 (=19−1)(Q218).

In the following, the same processes as described above are carried outas to each desired music number i=3, 4, . . . (and each number or countof remaining music pieces j=18, 17, . . . ). When character data of themusic title (music number 20 and a music title corresponding thereto) ofthe desired music number i=20 (the number or count of remaining musicpieces j=1) has been stored (Q216), then, it is determined whether ornot the predetermined number of music pieces have been stored (whetheror not the number or count of remaining music pieces j≦1 holds). Now,since the number or count of remaining music pieces=1 holds (Yes toQ217), the whole reading process is terminated (Q219).

At this time point, reading of desired character data (attributeinformation, display information) of the disc title (the total number ofmusic pieces+the disc title) and the music titles (the musicnumbers+corresponding music titles) of all the music pieces (20 pieces)starting from music number 1, and storing of the character data in thepredetermined area are completed.

Further, in the above process for obtaining (data of) a desired musicnumber, it is only required that the track number is changed, and henceit is also possible to obtain the data thereof, by using a signal forrequesting a continuous depression of the REW key (i.e. the REWINDsignal), as shown in FIG. 17 (in an area enclosed by square bracketsQ212). Further, if the formula of “i←i+1” (Q218) for setting the musicnumber of a next music piece is changed to the formula of “i←i−1”, it ispossible to store data of music titles (music numbers+music titles) inreverse order (in descending order in contrast to ascending order in theabove example).

Although in the above description, the MD 92 with each track number anda music number in agreement with each other was taken as an example,attribute information may be more finely controlled on sector-by-sectorbasis or cluster-by-cluster basis in a manner corresponding to a dataformat of data stored in the MD 92. Further, it is also possible toemploy an MD 92, for instance, in which one music number is correlatedto a plurality of tracks to thereby store more information including anartist's name and the like as the information of one music piece.Further, such an MD 92 can be applied to a combination of an MD playerand a remote controller which are capable of playing back the MD 92 anddisplaying the above more attribute information, if the MD player isconnected to the remote controller in place of the above MD player 90,and a processing program is changed such that each request signalgenerated by operating a corresponding one of the same request keys asthose on the connected remote controller is sent, or a combination ofrequest signals generated by a corresponding combination of request keysare sent.

Further, although in the above example, description was made assumingthat half-size display attribute data (or half-size display attributeinformation) and full-size display attribute data (or full-size displayattribute information) are distinguished from each other in dependenceon only whether or not full-size characters, such as Kanji letters orthe like, are included therein, this is not limitative, but half-sizedisplay characters each represented not by a two-byte code, such as aJIS character code, but by a one-byte code (generally employedconventional method) may be adopted to thereby distinguish the half-sizedisplay characters from full-size display characters represented by thetwo-byte codes.

In other words, in the above case, by limiting the number of half-sizedisplay characters to be represented by respective character codes, thehalf-size display characters can be represented based on a one-byte codesystem, permitting the reduction or saving of capacity of memory forstoring half-size display attribute data. In this case, the one-bytecode system is used for the convenience of the capacity of memory beingreduced. Hence, this method of discrimination is also based on theconcept that half-size display attribute data and full-size displayattribute data are distinguished from each other in dependence onwhether or not a full-size display character (character represented by acode of a particular code set or system), such as Kanji letters or thelike, is included in the attribute data, and therefore is included inthe category of the above explanation.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 18, a program routine may be programmedwhich includes subroutines (in the form of modules) in a disc titlerequesting/storing process (S201) corresponding to the FIG. 15 process,a music title-requesting preparation process (S202) corresponding to theFIG. 16 process, and a music title requesting/storing process (S203)corresponding to the FIG. 17 process to sequentially activate thesubroutines, to thereby carry out the same processing as described abovewith reference to FIGS. 15 to 17 as the print data-reading process(S20). Further, although this program routine is an interrupt handlingroutine activated by depression of the read key 36 (read key interrupt),this is not limitative, but the overall process (S20) may be furtherprogrammed as a subroutine such that the process can be activated from aprocessing routine at the upper level.

As described above, the MD player 90 (disc playback system) isconstructed such that it receives request signals generated through keyoperation of the remote controller, and sends, to the remote controller,character data items selected from character data for display on thedisplay block of the remote controller, so that if the tape printingapparatus 1 generates the same request signals as generated by theremote controller to thereby carry out the same processing as carriedout when the signals are generated by the remote controller, the samecharacter data as obtained by the remote controller can be obtained bythe apparatus 1.

On the other hand, according to the tape printing apparatus 1, aplurality of request signals are generated simply by depressing the read(request) key 36 (through a single operation of external operatingmeans), and a plurality of successive request signals formed bycombining the plurality of request signals are sent to the MD player 90(disc playback system), so that it is possible to obtain a plurality ofcharacter data items responding to the plurality of successive requestsignals through the single operation of external operating means.

For instance, in the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 15to 18, character data of the disc title (the total number of musicpieces+a disc title) and the music titles (the music numbers+musictitles) of all the music pieces (20 music pieces) starting from musicnumber 1 is obtained (received or read in). Although to obtain such anamount of character data (display data) by operating the remotecontroller, at least 22 key operations (for Q201×1, Q206×1, and Q212×20)are required, according to the tape printing apparatus 1, as describedabove, it is possible to obtain the amount of character data (displaydata) by a single operation of the read key.

As a result, part or whole of obtained data can be printed on a labeldirectly or after editing the same, and hence it is possible to formbeautiful labels for affixation to an MD (disc) cartridge 91 and an MD(disc) case 93 (see FIGS. 5A to 6) by a simplified operation.

Further, it is preferred that a request signal for requesting all thecharacter data items to be printed on a label is included in a pluralityof successive request signals.

In the example described above with reference to FIGS. 15 to 18, forinstance, character data of a disc title (the total number or count ofmusic pieces+a disc title) and music titles (music numbers+music titles)of all music pieces (20 music pieces) starting from music number 1 isobtained. This means all the character data items except for additionalinformation, such as artists' names and the like, out of all thecharacter data items to be printed on the main labels LM shown in FIGS.5A and 5B and the FIG. 5C side label are obtained by a single operationof the read key 36.

It should be noted that when the additional information, such asartists'names and the like, can be received immediately after obtainingthe music numbers+music titles in the music number display mode (if theabove additional information is regarded as part of the character dataof the music titles, an additional information-obtaining (receiving,reading) process is the same process as the print data-reading process,or alternatively the additional information may be processed as a thirdresponse data successive to the music titles), all the character dataitems including the additional information, such as artists' names andthe like, can be obtained through a single operation of the read key 36.

That is, in this case, a request signal for requesting all the characterdata items to be printed e.g. on the FIGS. 5A to 5C labels is includedin a plurality of successive request signals generated by a singleoperation of the read key 36, so that all the character data itemsrequired for printing on these labels can be obtained by executing thesingle operation of the read key 36, which makes it possible to moreeasily form the labels shown in the FIGS. 5A to 5C, for instance.

Next, changes in edit modes and a typical screen display process of thetape printing apparatus 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19to 21.

Referring to FIG. 19, the tape printing apparatus 1 has a basic entrymode (H1), a character selection/entry mode (H2), a symbolselection/entry mode (H3), and a function-selecting/setting mode (H5),as basic edit mode, and in the case of the Japanese language-adaptedtype of the tape printing apparatus 1 which is capable of processingJapanese language, additionally, a Kana/Kanji conversion mode (H4) forcarrying out conversion between Japanese Kana letters and Kanji letters.

Immediately after the power key 31 is depressed, that is, immediatelyafter the power of the tape printing apparatus 1 is turned on, theapparatus is set to the basic entry mode (H1), and then by operatingfunction keys, the edit mode can be changed between the basic entry mode(H1) and the other edit modes as well as between the characterselection/entry mode (H2) and the symbol selection/entry mode (H3).

First, if the character key 34C is depressed in the basic entry mode(H1), the apparatus is set to the character selection/entry mode (H2),whereas if the enter key 38 is depressed after selecting characters, orwhen the delete key 35 is depressed in order to stop acharacter-selecting process, the apparatus returns to the basic entrymode (H1).

If the symbol key 34D is depressed instead of the character key 34C inthe basic entry mode (H1), the apparatus is set to the symbolselection/entry mode (H3). Further, if the symbol key 34D is depressedin the character selection/entry mode (H2), or the character key 34C isdepressed in the symbol selection/entry mode (H3), the characterselection/entry mode (H2) and the symbol selection/entry mode (H3) areinterchanged.

Further, in the case of the Japanese language-adapted type of the tapeprinting apparatus 1, when the conversion mode key 37S is depressed inthe basic entry mode (H1), the apparatus is set to the Kana/Kanjiconversion mode (H4), whereas when the conversion mode key 37S is againdepressed in the resulting mode, or when the enter key 38 is depressedafter carrying out the Kana/Kanji conversion, or when the delete key 35is depressed in order to stop the Kana/Kanji conversion process, theapparatus returns to the basic entry mode (H1).

Further, when the apparatus is in the basic entry mode (H1), if thedecoration key 34F, the format key 34FS, the frame key 34CS or theadjustment key 34DS is depressed, the apparatus is set to thefunction-selecting/setting mode (H5), and if the enter key 38 isdepressed after a function-setting process is terminated, or if thedelete key 35 is depressed in order to stop the function-settingprocess, the apparatus returns to the basic entry mode (H1).

As described hereinbefore with reference to FIG. 13, when the power key31 is depressed, the initialization of the system is carried out, andthe image that was displayed on the display screen 41 before the powerwas turned off the last time is shown as the initial screen. However,since the apparatus is set to the basic entry mode (H1) immediatelyafter the power is turned on, as described above, the image that wasdisplayed in the basic entry mode (H1) before the power was turned offthe last time is shown as the initial screen (S2).

When the tape printing apparatus 1 is shipped from a factory or beforeit is used, no character data (text data) is displayed on the displayscreen 41. The initial screen in such a state displays, as shown inFIGS. 20A and 20B, the cursor K at the right end of the coordinates C5,and a capital letter “D” (representative of “Disc Title”, since a disctitle is usually used as a title to be printed on labels, as describedhereinabove) indicative of a title line at a location of the coordinatesCE and CF (G0). Hereinafter, this state is referred to as “thetext-initialized state”, which is used to mean the state of no text databeing available. FIG. 20C shows an example of a title displayed.

On the other hand, for instance, assuming that a character string“Someday” was displayed in half size (i.e. by using half-sizecharacters) as character data representative of the title of musicnumber i=2 before the power was turned off the last time, the initialscreen becomes a screen reproducing the screen displayed then, as shownin FIG. 21 (G11). Further, in the indicator display block 4 i at thistime, indicators indicative of active ones out of modes and states setbefore the power was turned off are lighted. It should be noted that inFIGS. 20B, 20C, and so forth, a portion representative of the indicatordisplay block 4 i does not represent an actual image, but shows adescription of the state of indicator display block 4 i and hence it isshown in a state enclosed by broken lines.

When the all character delete key 35S is depressed from the above state(G11), a message prompting the user to confirm that all charactersdisplayed are to be deleted is displayed in a flickering (orhighlighted) manner (G12). Hereinafter, characters displayed in theflickering or highlighted manner are expressed in a shaded manner asshown in screen G12 in FIG. 21. Although it is possible to switchbetween the above two manners of display (flickering and highlighting)by configuring internal modes of the apparatus, detailed descriptionthereof is omitted.) When the enter key 38 is depressed, all charactersare deleted to initialize the display screen to the sametext-initialized state as it was in when the apparatus was shipped fromthe factory (G13: the same screen as G0).

As described above, the tape printing apparatus 1 is set to the basicentry mode (H1) immediately after the power is turned on, and theinitial screen displayed in the state is the screen G0 in thetext-initialized state or a screen displaying characters (text) thatwere displayed before the power was turned off the last time (G13 or thelike).

It is considered that a case in which some characters were displayedbefore the power was turned off the last time occurs more often thanspecial cases where all characters displayed are deleted as describedabove or where the apparatus has just been shipped from the factory orbefore it is used. Hence, in the following description, a screen similarto the above screen G11 is shown as an example of an image that wasdisplayed before the power was turned off the last time, and descriptionis made assuming that key operation is started from the state of thescreen (G11 or the like).

Therefore, next, the print data-reading process (S20) described abovewith reference to FIGS. 15 to 18 (e.g. FIG. 18 print data-readingprocess) will be described from the viewpoint of key operation carriedout by the user and screens displayed in response to the key operation.

Referring to FIG. 22, when the user depresses the read key 36 in thestate of the same screen as G21 being displayed, the print data-readingprocess (S20) is activated as an interrupt handling routine. Then, amessage “ALL ?” prompting the user to confirm that the reading processfor reading all data is to be executed is displayed, and character dataor the like displayed is saved (backed up) in case of the readingprocess being stopped (G22). The above message was omitted in FIG. 15.

Here, when a key other than the enter key 38 and the read key 36 isdepressed, the reading process is stopped to restore the stored originalcharacter data, i.e. return to the screen (G21) displayed beforedepressing the read key 36. Further, when the user depresses the enterkey 38 or the read key 36 after confirming that the process to beexecuted is the reading process, a message “READING” is displayed, andat the same time the reading process described above with reference toFIG. 18 and the like is carried out. Then, after the lapse of a certaintime period, that is, after all the data items are read in, it isdetermined at step S24 whether or not both half-size display attributeinformation and full-size display attribute information has been readin.

In the above example, for instance, in the case of a logical expression“half-size display disc title flag. or. half-size display music titleflag=1”, character data (half-size display attribute data: hereinafterreferred to as “the half-size code data” for purposes of ease ofintuitive understanding, Kana character codes being included in the datain the case of Japanese language-adapted type of the apparatus, asdescribed hereinbefore) of the half-size display attribute information(here, half-size display disc title or half-size display music title) isread in. In this case, as described above, the character data (half-sizecode data) read in is stored in the half-size display attribute dataarea (second storage area) 245 in the RAM 240.

On the other hand, in the case of a logical expression “full-sizedisplay disc title flag. or. full-size display music title flag=1”,character data (full-size display attribute data: hereinafter referredto as “the full-size code data” for purposes of ease of intuitiveunderstanding) of the full-size display attribute information (full-sizedisplay disc title or full-size display music title) is read in. In thiscase, as described above, the character data (full-size code data) readin is stored in the full-size display attribute data area (first storagearea) 246 in the RAM 240.

When only one of the full-size code data and the half-size code data hasbeen read in (No to S24), the title of a first music piece in the readcode data is displayed. For instance, if only the half-size code datahas been read in, the title of a first music piece is displayed based onthe half-size code data (G25). That is, in this case, character (code)data for display is stored in the text data area 242 in the RAM 240,which serves as a text data-editing area, while corresponding character(image) data is stored as dot matrix data into the display image dataarea 243 in the same, which serves a display image (display characterimage)-editing area.

Here, if the user depresses the print key 39, character (image) datacorresponding to the character (code) data of the displayed code type ofthe disc title, music titles and so forth is similarly stored as dotmatrix data into the print image data area 244 in the RAM 240, that is,into a print image (print character image)-editing area in the RAM 240,such that the character (image) data is arranged in a predeterminedmanner. A printing process for printing the character (image) data willbe described hereinafter.

On the other hand, when the full-size code data and the half-size codedata are both read in (Yes to S24), the program proceeds to a next step(S26), wherein code type selection is carried out by the user. It shouldbe noted that an abnormal case in which neither the full-size code datanor the half-size code data is read in will be described later.

When the program proceeds to the code type selection by the user (S26),as shown in FIG. 23, a message “FULL-C ?” appears which prompts the userto effect a key entry answering the message questioning as to whether ornot the full-size code data should be selected (G27). Here, when theuser depresses the enter key 38, the full-size code data is selected todisplay the music title (full-size display music title) based on thefull-size code data (G29). In short, in this case, image datacorresponding to the character data of the full-size display music titleis stored as dot matrix data into the display image data area 243.

Further, in the code selection, it is possible to change the display ofthe option “FULL-C” to the display of the option “HALF-C” for selectionof the half-size code data through operation of the down arrow key 33D”(G28). Furthermore, it is also possible to operate the up arrow key 33Ufrom the state (G28) to thereby return the display screen to the screenG27 displaying the option “FULL-C”.

When the user depresses the enter key 38 in the sate of the option“HALF-C” being displayed (G28), the half-size code data is selected todisplay the music title (half-size display music title) based on thehalf-size code data (G30). In short, in this case, image datacorresponding to the character data of the half-size display music titleis stored as dot matrix data into the display image data area 243.

Further, when the user depresses the delete key 35 in one of the abovestates (G27 or G28), the character data displayed before depressing theprint key 39 is restored, i.e. the display screen returns to the screen(G31: the same as G21), similarly to the case of the reading processbeing interrupted.

Although in the above example, the title of the first music piece isdisplayed as a typical screen display, this is not limitative, but atitle (disc title: half-size display disc title or full-size displaydisc title) may be displayed in place of the title of the first musicpiece.

Further, although in the above example, the user depresses the read key36 in order to read in all the data items (data items of all the musicpieces), this is not limitative, but the line read key 36S may bedepressed instead of the read key 36, whereby new character datacorresponding to only character data on a desired line can be read in toreplace the old character data with the new character data.

For instance, when the line read key 36S is depressed in the state ofthe title of the music number i=2 being displayed (e.g. G21), a message“LINE ?” is displayed instead of the above message “ALL ?”, and then ifthe enter key 38 or the read key 36 (or the line read key 36S) isdepressed, new character data of the music number i=2 is read in toreplace the old character data with the new character data.

Further, in the state of a title (disc title) being displayed, if theline read key 36S is depressed, new character data of the title is readin similarly to the case of the music title, whereby the old characterdata is replaced with the new character data of the disc title. In thetext-initialized state (G0 or G13) described above with reference toFIGS. 20B and 21, the cursor K is set or placed on a title line, so thatwhen the line read key 36S is depressed, new character data of a titleis read in.

It should be noted that when the read key 36 or the line read key 36S isdepressed in a mode other than the basic entry mode (H1), an errormessage is displayed to indicate that the key is depressed in animproper edit mode, and the reading process is not carried out.

Further, if an abnormality other than the above occurs, the followingprocessing is carried out. That is, if the reading process is carriedout to eventually read in neither the half-size code data nor thefull-size code data, or if there exists invalid data, or if a (remote)control communication error occurs, an error message is displayed tonotify the user that an error has occurred during the reading process,whereas if the read key 36 is depressed in a state where the tapeprinting apparatus 1 is not connected to the MD player 90, or if normalconnection between the apparatus and the MD player 90 is broken duringthe reading process, an error message is displayed to notify the userthat the apparatus is not connected to the MD player 90. In any of theabove cases, the user is notified of the error and then, similarly tothe case of the reading process being interrupted, and the originalcharacter data is restored to return the display screen to the screen(the same as G21) displayed before starting the present process.

Still further, when the delete key 35 is depressed during the readingprocess, the user is notified that the reading process is interrupted,and then the display screen returns to the screen displayed before.Further, when the power is turned off (by depressing the power key 31),an error message is displayed to notify the user that the readingprocess is interrupted, and then all the display and indications areturned off, and thereafter, if the power is turned on again, similarlyto the case of the reading process being interrupted, the old characterdata having been in use is restored to return the display screen to thescreen displayed before (the same as G21).

As described above, in the tape printing apparatus 1, an area forstoring attribute information (character groups) read in from the MD 92is determined based on whether or not the attribute information isfull-size display attribute information (whether or not the charactercodes of character groups read out from a disc include a character codeof a specific code group), that is, whether the attribute information isfull-size code data or half-size code data. For instance, if theattribute information is full-size code data, it is stored in thefull-size display attribute data area (first storage area) 246, whereasif it is half-size code data, it is stored in the half-size displayattribute data area (second storage area) 245.

Therefore, at the following steps, it is only required that characterdata is read out from one of the areas 245 and 246, and there is no needto determine whether the read character data is half-size code data orfull-size code data.

Further, this makes it possible to program the process such that theprocess branches according to the result of the above areadetermination, thereby enhancing processing efficiency, such as averageprocessing speed, and processing capability of the apparatus.

For instance, full-size code data includes character codes of Kanjiletters in the case of the Japanese language-adapted type of the tapeprinting apparatus 1, and hence, it is possible to easily view orrecognize a title (disc title), music titles or the like as well aseasily display and print the same as a compact image, since Kanjiletters are included therein. This makes it easy to print music titlesof more music pieces on a main label LM, and add additional information,such as artists' names and the like, to the attribute information.Further, in the JIS code system for use with the MD system, forinstance, simple figures, symbols and the like are encoded similarly togeneral characters. These figures and symbols are basically processed asfull-size display characters similarly to Kanji letters. Since theapparatus according to the present embodiments is capable of processingthe full-size code data, that is, characters including full-size displaycharacters, such figures and symbols can be included in displayed imagesand printed images, whereby it is possible to display or print morediversified and attractive images.

On the other hand, in the case of half-size code data, displaycharacters are uniformly half-size display characters, and hence it ispossible to omit processes of determining whether characters are of fullsize or of half size to determine display areas and printing areastherefor. That is, the process may be programmed to branch according tothe result of the above storage area determination dependent on the codetype, whereby when half-size code data is to be processed, part of stepsrequired for processing full-size code data can be omitted, whichresults in the increased processing efficiency.

Further, as described above, the MD 92 has the storage area for storingdata of half size characters (half-size code data storage area) and thestorage area for storing data of full-size characters (full-size codedata storage area) defined separately from each other in view of thedifference in the above data processing.

Further, since half-size code data and full-size code data are sent insuccession in response to a single request signal, it is determined thatdata of characters sent from the half-size code data storage area ishalf-size code data and data of characters sent from the full-size codedata storage area is full-size code data, whereby it is possible tosimplify a code type-determining process. This enables groups ofcharacters sent from the two storage areas in the MD 92 to be easilystored in respective storage areas in the RAM 240, i.e., in thehalf-size display attribute data area (second storage area) 245 and thefull-size display attribute data area (first storage area) 246,respectively, in a discriminating manner thereby enhancing theprocessing efficiency.

Further, in the tape printing apparatus 1, when character groups havebeen stored in only one of the full-size display attribute data area(first storage area) 246 and the half-size display attribute data area(second storage area) 245, i.e. when only one of the full-size code dataand the half-size code data has been read in, character image datacorresponding to the character groups (character data of the musictitles, for instance) represented by the code data read in is stored asdot matrix data into the display image data area 243 in the RAM 240,which is the display image (display character image)-editing area, andthe stored character (image) data is displayed (processed). On the otherhand, when character groups are stored in both of the first storage area246 and the second storage area 245, that is, when the full-size codedata and the half-size code data have been both read in, the programproceeds to the next step, wherein the code type selection by the useris carried out. Then, character image data corresponding to thecharacter groups of the selected code type is stored as dot matrix datainto the display image data area 243, and the stored character (image)data is displayed (processed) as data for display (processing).

Further, if the user depresses the print key 39, image datacorresponding to characters of the same code type as that of the abovecharacter (image) data displayed is stored as dot matrix data into theprint image data area 244 as the print image (print characterimage)-editing area in the RAM 240, such that the image data is arrangedin a predetermined manner. Then, the stored character (image) data isprinted (processed) as data for printing (processing). Although in theabove display process and printing process, characters are stored intothe corresponding editing area as image data in dot-matrix form, this isnot limitative but, for instance, in a process for transmitting data toanother device at a subsequent step, e.g., in a communication process,character codes (text codes) are stored as they are, into an editingarea for the communication process (for instance, into the text dataarea 242 provided for a general editing process).

As described above, according to the tape printing apparatus 1, whenonly one of the full-size code data and the half-size code data is readin (stored) as well as when the full-size code data and the half-sizecode data are both read in (stored), character data stored in an editingarea can be processed as data for display, printing or the like, withoutany problems. This makes it possible to read out attribute information(character groups) stored in the MD (disc) 92 for processing, regardlessof whether or not the attribute information is full-size displayattribute information (i.e. whether or not a character represented by acharacter code of a particular code group or system is included in theattribute information).

Further, even when both of the two types of code data are read in(stored), only one of them can be selected for processing, so that theprocessing efficiency is prevented from being degraded from the priorart. Furthermore, in the above example, the user can select his desiredcode type, so that the user's intention can be faithfully reflected onthe following processes.

Moreover, the tape printing apparatus 1 may be configured such that oneof the full-size code data and the half-size code data, for instance,the full-size code data which enables more attractive labels to beformed is selected not arbitrarily by the user but by default.Alternatively, the apparatus may be configured such that it is capableof carrying out both arbitrary selection and default selection, and,only when arbitrary selection is not carried out, a predetermined codeor a code arbitrarily selected in the immediately preceding occasion isselected by default.

Now, in general, in a character printing device for printing charactergroups each including one or more characters, it is checked beforeprinting by using a display device thereof or the like, how manyprinting areas of a predetermined size are required (for instance, howmany pages are required, assuming that one printing area of thepredetermined size is equivalent to one page) for printing the charactergroups (groups of character images corresponding to respective charactercodes) desired to be printed. Thereafter, printing operation is carriedout. Otherwise, if there is not sufficient time before printing, forinstance, the check is carried out after printing.

However, there has not been proposed a character printing device, which,when the size of a printable area is fixed due to a predetermined limitset to the number of characters, the number of lines or the number ofpages, for printing, directly designates such a limit and extracts partof character groups for printing such that the extracted part is adaptedto the printable area of the limited size. Still less proposed is acharacter printing device which notifies the user of the existence ofunprinted portion of the character groups.

For instance, in a word processor or the like, the number of pages iseventually designated by designating a print starting page and a printending page. However, the limit of the number of pages is not directlydesignated, and hence there is no means to tell whether or not the userintended to print all the desired character groups in pages up to theprint ending page. Therefore, if all the character groups cannot beprinted within the limited number of pages, it is impossible to print amessage notifying the user of the fact. To print such a message, theuser himself is required to carry out the check via the display screenand enter characters notifying the fact. The same applies to a tapeprinting apparatus or the like, which does not print on a predeterminedsize of a printing area, but requires the user to set a size thereofe.g. by setting a fixed length.

As an improvement over the conventional printing apparatus, in the tapeprinting apparatus 1 according to the invention, it is possible todirectly designate a print size equal to an integral multiple of areference size and extract character groups adapted to the printing areaof the print size, for printing. Further, if all of the character groupscannot be printed within the designated print size, characters fornotifying the user of the fact can be added for printing. In thefollowing, this novel printing capability will be described in furtherdetail with reference to FIGS. 24 to 27B.

As shown in FIG. 24, when the user depresses the print key 39 in thebasic entry mode, e.g., in the state of the same screen as describedabove (G11, G21, G31) being displayed (G419), the printing process isactivated as an interrupt handling routine to display, first of all, ascreen of menu options of print sizes, more specifically, a selectionscreen for selecting a type of label to be printed. By default, anoption selected in the immediately preceding occasion (in theillustrated example, “DISC”, for instance) is first displayed (G42).

In this state, the user can sequentially display other options byoperating the cursor key 33 (33U, 33D, 33L and 33R) (G42 to G44). Forinstance, when the down arrow key 33D or the right arrow key 33R isrepeatedly depressed, the options are sequentially displayed in theorder of “DISC”→“CASE”→“SIDE”→“DISC”. Similarly, when the up arrow key33U or the left arrow key 33L is repeatedly depressed, the options aresequentially displayed in the order of “DISC”→“SIDE”→“CASE”→“DISC”.

Actually, in addition to the above options, there is provided an optionfor “normal tape” for designating a printing area on a tape T withouthalf-die-cut labels formed thereon. When the option for “normal tape” isselected, the width of the tape T is determined from the type of tape Tdetected by the above-mentioned tape-discriminating sensor 141 (see FIG.2) and a print image adapted to a printing area having a print widthequal to the width of the tape T (or printing area formed by eliminatingpredetermined lateral margins from the tape T) can be produced. However,this option is not related to the invention, so that description thereofis omitted. Hereinafter, only a process for selecting theabove-mentioned options for producing labels and subsequent processeswill be described.

When the delete key 35 is depressed in a state (G42 to G44) where any ofthe options of the FIG. 24 print sizes (types of labels, i.e. labelsizes) is displayed, the printing process is stopped, followed byreturning to the preceding screen in the basic entry mode. (G41). On theother hand, when the user depresses the enter key 38, it is determinedat step S45 whether or not print data (print image data for printing) isavailable.

When the print key 39 is depressed in the text-initialized state (G0)described above with reference to FIG. 20B, or in a state where there isno available character (code) data of a disc title (title) and musictitles, and at the same time the option “DISC” or “CASE” has beenselected, or in a state where the character (code) data of music titlesand the like is available but that of a disc title (title) is notavailable, and at the same time the option “SIDE” has been selected, theprogram cannot proceed to a print data-forming process or the like (Noto S45), even if the print size selection is completed. Hence, an errormessage is displayed to notify the user that there is no available data(S46) and then, the display screen returns to the basic entry mode afterthe lapse of a predetermined time period, that is, to the screendisplayed before the print key 39 was depressed.

On the other hand, when character data is available (Yes to S45), next,as shown in FIG. 25, a print-confirming process is carried out todisplay a confirmation message “PRINT?” (S47: see FIG. 26). When theenter key 38 is depressed in this state, next, an “IN PREP” (inpreparation) display process for displaying a message “IN PREP” iscarried out (S48). If one of the other keys is depressed, the displayscreen returns to the basic entry mode (G51: the same as G41).

Next, in the in-preparation display process (S48), a print data-formingprocess (S481), a label-positioning process (S482), and a process (S483)for determining whether or not detection (that is, a detected tapeposition or the like) is normal (described hereinafter in detail) aremainly carried out in the state of the message “IN PREP” being displayed(S480: see FIG. 26). In the course of executing these processes, if thepower key 31 or the delete key 35 is depressed, or if it is detected (bylid opening/closing sensor 142) that the lid 21 is open, an errormessage is displayed to notify the user of the fact and then, theprinting process is interrupted at step S52, followed by returning tothe basic entry mode (G51).

Further, if the tape cartridge 5 is not mounted, if the tape cartridge 5mounted is different from the selected one (that is, the tape cartridge5 mounted is not of the type formed with selected labels), or if thereference hole TH detected tells that the tape position is abnormal (Noto S483), a “CHANGE LABEL” display process for displaying an errormessage to advise the user to change labels (i.e. to mount a tapecartridge 5 holding a tape T corresponding to selected label) is carriedout, followed by returning to the preceding screen in the basic entrymode (S51).

On the other hand, when the in-preparation display process (S48) isnormally terminated, next, a during-printing display process (S50) isexecuted. In the during-printing display process (S50), printingoperation is mainly carried out (S502), in a state of a message beingdisplayed to notify the user that the printing process is being carriedout. After that, the display screen returns to the basic entry mode. Inthis process (S50) as well, during execution of these steps, if thepower key 31 or the delete key 35 is depressed, or if it is detectedthat the lid 21 is open, an error message is displayed to notify theuser of the fact and then, the printing process is stopped (S52),followed by returning to the basic entry mode (S51).

By executing the above printing process, it is possible to print a printimage adapted to the type of a label (i.e. label size) selected for aprint size, in a printing area on a half-die-cut label formed on thetape T mounted, and thereby form a desired one of various labelsdescribed hereinabove with reference to FIGS. 5A to 5C.

Now, the in-preparation display process (S48) and the during-printingdisplay process (S50) will be described in more detail.

Referring to FIG. 26, in the print-confirming process, when the enterkey 38 or the print key 39 is depressed in the state of the confirmationmessage “PRINT ?” being displayed (S47) to start the in-preparationdisplay process (S48), the message “IN PREP” is displayed (S480). Inthis state, first, the print data-forming process (S481) is carried out.

In the print data-forming process (S481), first, it is determined atS4811 whether or not the option “DISC” or “CASE” is selected. Wheneither of them is selected (Yes to S4811), it is determined based on theresult of the detection by the tape-discriminating sensor 141 whether ornot a tape cartridge 5 holding a tape T for making main labels LM ismounted (S4812). If it is not mounted (No to S4812), as described above,next, the message “CHANGE LABEL” is displayed (S49).

On the other hand, if neither the option “DISC” nor “CASE” is selectedas a label to be produced, that is, when a side label is selected (No toS4811), or when the option “DISC” or “CASE” is selected (Yes to S4811),and at the same time when the tape cartridge 5 holding the tape T formaking the same is mounted (Yes to S4812), next, a print image-formingprocess (S4813) is carried out.

As described above, in the text data area 242 in the RAM 240 is storedcharacter (code) data of characters including ones displayed in thebasic entry mode (G41 in FIG. 24, for instance), so that in the printimage-forming process (S4813), character (image) data corresponding tocharacter (code) data of a disc title, music titles, etc. stored in thetext data area 242 (i.e. corresponding to data for display on thedisplay screen in the basic entry mode) is formed as dot matrix data andstored in the print image data area 244 in the RAM 240 such that theimage data is arranged in a predetermined manner. Thus, the character(code) data is formed into a print image (print image data).

After the print image-forming process (S4813) is terminated andaccordingly the print data-forming process (S481) is terminated, thelabel-positioning process (S482) is carried out. In this process (S482),first, a printing position in a vertical direction (in the direction ofthe width of the tape T) is adjusted (S4821). Then, presence or absenceof a side label is detected (it is detected whether or not a tapecartridge 5 holding a tape T for making side labels LS is mounted), anda printing position in a horizontal direction (in the direction of thelength of the tape T) is adjusted (S4822).

After terminating the label-positioning process (S482), it is determinedat step S483 whether or not the detection (i.e. detected tape position)is normal, to terminate the in-preparation display process (S48). If thedetection is normal (Yes to S483), the during-printing display process(S50) is carried out. The vertical printing position adjustment (S4821),the side label presence/absence detection & horizontal printing positionadjustment (S4822), and the determination of whether or not thedetection (i.e. detected tape position) is normal (S483) will bedescribed hereinafter.

In the during-printing display process (S50), a message is displayed fornotifying the user that printing operation is being carried out (S501),and in the state of the message being displayed, next, the printingoperation is carried out (S502). After printing, a predetermined postprinting tape feed is executed (S503) and then, it is determined at stepS504 whether or not a case label is designated (that is, the option“CASE” is selected), at the same time a first label has been printed,and at the same time data of a second label is available. That is, it isdetermined whether or not the conditions of the case label beingdesignated & printing of the first label being completed & second labeldata being available are fulfilled. If these conditions are notfulfilled (No to S504), the display screen returns to the basic entrymode.

If the above conditions are fulfilled (Yes to S504), to form (print) thesecond main label LM, the print image-forming process (S4813) up to thepost printing tape feed process (S503) are similarly carried out. Oncethese processes are carried out, the same conditions are not fulfilledon the following occasion of the determination step, and hence thedisplay screen returns to the basic entry mode.

It should be noted that as to the vertical printing position adjustment(S4821), if the settings of the vertical printing position are changedby a method described hereinbelow, and then once adjusted, there is noneed to adjust the same, until they are further changed. At the stepS4821, therefore, it is only required to check by using flags or thelike if the printing position has already been adjusted. Similarly, asto the side label presence/absence detection (part of S4822) as well, ifonly detection of the opening and closing of the lid 21 by the lidopening/closing sensor 142 is once carried out, it is only required tocheck by using flags or the like if the detection has already beenexecuted (when the side label presence/absence detection is describedhereinafter, this checking process is included in a subroutine forcarrying out the detection process).

Next, the meaning of the above determination as to the conditions of thecase label being designated & printing of the first label beingcompleted & second label data being available will be described based onexamples. In the FIG. 5A example, the disc label is shown, whereas inthe FIG. 5B example, the case label formed by adding artist's names tothe FIG. 5A example is shown. However, since it is difficult to directlycompare these examples with each other, in the following description,comparison will be made based on other examples.

Let it be assumed that in the configuration of editing (characterdecoration or the like) at a given time point, and in a state where itis possible to print eleven characters (of each title (title or musictitle)) exclusive of a music number and a delimiter per line, and it ispossible to print twenty lines per label (page), if all the titles,music numbers and music titles are desired to be printed based oncharacter (code) data read out from the MD 92, a print image (printimage data) is produced, as shown in FIG. 27A.

More specifically, let it be assumed, for instance, that in the textdata area 242, there is stored sufficient character data for forming aprint image, which includes a title and the music numbers and musictitles of a total of 45 music pieces (that is, up to “45. A45B . . . ),more specifically, in which there are arranged a title (here,provisionally represented by “⋆ TITLE”) formed of one line on a 1stline; a music number “1” with a delimiter “.” and the title (similarly,provisionally represented by “A1B1C1D1E1F1G1”) of this music number on2nd to 3rd lines; a music number with the delimiter “2.” and the musictitle “A2B2C2” of this number on a 4th line; “3. A3B3C3D3E3F3G” on 5thto 6th lines; “4. A4B4C4D4E4F” on a 7th line; . . . “11. A11B11C11D1” ona 19th line; “12. A12B12C12D12E12F12” on 20th to 21st lines; “13.A13B12C13D13E13” on 22nd to 23rd lines; “14. A14B14C14” on a 24th line;and so forth.

When the print key 39 is depressed in the above state to start theprinting process and select a case label, the print image (data) is laidout to the 20th line for printing on the first main label LM. At thistime point, the conditions of the case label being designated & printingof the first label being completed & second label data being availableare fulfilled (Yes to S504), and hence, next, the 21st to 39th lines ofthe print image (data) are laid out on the second main label LM, and atthe same time notification characters saying that other music pieces areomitted (“XX OTHER TITLES” in which XX represent a numerical value inthe case of the examples illustrated in FIGS. 5A and 5B) are added tothe last line (40th line) for printing the same. At this time point, theconditions of the case label being designated & printing of the firstlabel being completed & second label data being available are no longerfulfilled (No to S504), and hence the printing process is terminated,followed by returning to the basic entry mode.

In the above case, sine the title of the 12th music piece is laid out onthe 20th to 21st lines, the second line extends beyond the boundary ofthe page. Although according to the tape printing apparatus 1, in such acase, actually, the 20th line is set to an empty line to print the 12thmusic piece on the 21st to 22nd lines, the present description is madewithout taking the processing into account.

Further, the notification characters saying that other music pieces areomitted, which are inserted onto the last line, may be “A TOTAL OF XXTITLES” (“A TOTAL OF 45 TITLES” in the above examples) in place of thenotification characters “XX OTHER TITLES” employed in the FIGS. 5A and5B examples. That is, in the case of “A TOTAL OF XX TITLES”, the numberor count of music pieces printed (equal to the last music numberprinted) can be grasped, so that if it is understood from thenotification characters that the print image includes e.g. a total of 45titles, it is possible to comprehend that there are music titlesunprinted (the printing of the same was omitted) and grasp or calculatethe number of music pieces omitted. In short, the notificationcharacters “A TOTAL OF XX TITLES” is also the notification saying thatother music pieces are omitted.

Furthermore, also when the printing of music titles is not omitted, thenotifications of “XX OTHER TITLES” and “A TOTAL OF XX TITLES” added canserve as notification characters saying that no music titles areomitted, and hence are useful and convenient. However, when the numberor count of the music pieces is a total of 10, for instance, ifinformation of all the music pieces can be printed, a notification “ATITAL OF 10 TITLES” is neater in appearance than a notification “0 OTHERTITLES”. Hence, in the following, description will be made by using thenotification characters “A TOTAL OF XX TITLES”.

If the total number or count of music titles is equal to 10, i.e. ifsufficient character data is stored in the text data area 242, forforming a print image up to the 18th line of the illustrated example,that is, a print image including the title and the music numbers andmusic titles of a total of ten music pieces up to “10.A10B10C10D10E10F1”, all the character data items are laid out on thefirst main label LM, and the second main label LM becomes blank.

Further, when the option “DISC” is selected in the above sate where thesufficient character data for forming the print image comprised of thetitle, the music numbers and music titles of a total of 45 music pieces,since the disc label LMD has a printing area equal to that of the mainlabel LM, character data up to “11. A11B11C11D1”, i.e. the music numberand music title on the 19th line is laid out, as shown in FIG. 27B, anda print image having the notification characters “A TOTAL OF 45 TITLES”added on the last 20th line is printed.

As described above, according to the tape printing apparatus 1, byselecting either of the options “DISC” and “CASE” (selecting a printsize from a reference size and one or more kinds of enlarged sizes), itis possible to directly designate a print size equal to an integralmultiple of the label size (reference size) of the disc label (when theoption “DISC” is selected, the print size thereof is one time as largeas the size thereof, whereas when the option “CASE” is selected, theprint size thereof is two times as large as the size of the disc label).

This makes it possible to allocate predetermined but different part(s)of character groups to a main label when the option “DISC” is selected,and to first and second main labels (one or more divisional printingareas formed by dividing a printing area of a selected print size by thereference size) when the option “CASE” is selected, respectively, tothereby create print images corresponding to the laid-out portion(s) ofthe character groups for printing the same on a print material. Inshort, it is possible to directly designate a print size equal to anintegral multiple of the reference size to extract character groupsadapted to the printing area (each label) having the print size forprinting.

Further, in the tape printing apparatus 1, character groups are laid outin the printing area of a selected label size (print size), and when allof the character groups cannot be printed in the printing area,notification characters notifying the user of the fact are added to thecharacter groups. That is, since a print size equal to an integralmultiple of a reference size can be directly designated, it is possibleto determine whether or not all of the character groups (characterimages corresponding to respective character codes of characters of thecharacter groups) can be printed within the designated print size. As aresult, if it is determined that all of the character groups cannot beprinted, it is possible to print part thereof together with notificationcharacters notifying the user of the fact.

It should be noted that in the above embodiment, the notificationcharacters for printing may be added to the character groups ascharacter codes, thereafter collectively converting the same and thecharacter groups into an image (data) in dot matrix form, oralternatively the notification characters may be converted to an image(data) separately from the character groups, thereafter adding the image(image data) to the image (data) of the character groups. Further, whenit is determined that the all of the character groups can be printed,whether or not the notification characters for notifying the user of thefact should be added to the character groups can be selected by the useras he desires. Furthermore, it is possible to devise notificationcharacters which can be commonly used for notifying that the all of thecharacter groups cannot be printed, as well as for notifying that thesame can be printed, and it is convenient to employ such notificationcharacters for common use.

Further, in the tape printing apparatus 1, basically, a label size(print size) can be arbitrarily selected by the user, while it ispossible to detect the type of a tape (print material) T mounted in theapparatus 1, that is, the type of a half-die-cut label formed on thetape T, so that when the type of a label on the tape T does not agreewith that of a label selected by the user, an error message notifyingthe user of the fact is displayed to prompt the user to change the tapehaving the label. This permits selection of a label size (print size),which is adapted to both the user's intention and the type of the tape(print material) T.

Although the above description is mainly made of a disc label and a caselabel, that is, two types of labels each having a print size equal to anintegral multiple of a reference size (i.e. label size of the disclabel; the disc label has a print size one time as large as thereference size, whereas the case label has a print size two times aslarge as the reference size), this is not limitative, but according tothe tape printing apparatus 1, it is possible to select a side label aswell.

In other words, in the tape printing apparatus 1, character groupsstored in the MD (disc) 92 are read out and at the same time any oflabel sizes (print sizes) is selected regardless of the integralmultiple of the reference size or the like, whereby it is possible toextract part or whole of the character groups adapted to the selectedprint size and create a print image therefrom for printing. That is, byselecting any of several kinds of print sizes, character groups adaptedto the selected print size can be extracted for printing.

Next, description is made of the tape printing apparatus 1 regarded asan image-forming apparatus which converts each character (code) of acharacter string including one or more characters into a character imagebased on a predetermined font data, and forms an image having theresulting character images properly arranged therein.

In general, in order to display or print an image of a character stringincluding one or more characters, font data corresponding to text (code)data of each character of the character string is read out from the ROMor the like storing known font data, or dot matrix data registered bynonstandard character registration or image registration is read outfrom the RAM or the like (hereinafter the known font or the registereddot matrix is simply referred to as “the predetermined font”), and basedon the predetermined font data, a character image is formed and arrangedin a predetermined image-forming area, whereby display image data orprint image data representative of the image of the character string isproduced.

In a word processor or the like, an edit screen adjusted to a set ordetermined size of one page is displayed, and registered text data isread into the range of the edit screen, or new characters are inputthereto via the keyboard to permit editing of the text data or thecharacters input thereto. That is, an image of characters (characterimage) corresponding to the text data of character strings is formed asdot matrix data and arranged in a display image-forming area of apredetermined size, to display a display image thus formed. Further,after the edit process is terminated, by carrying out a key entry toinstruct printing operation, a print image which is the same image asdisplayed on the screen is printed. That is, a character imagecorresponding to the text data of the character strings is formed as dotmatrix data arranged in a print image area of the predetermined size,and the thus formed print image is printed.

In the above cases, for instance, when arbitrary new line-startingcodes, which can be inserted into the text (code) data of characterstrings as desired, are contained, lines of the character strings aredetermined or defined by these arbitrary new line-starting codes.However, when the length (number of characters or the like) of acharacter string on a line up to the arbitrary new line-starting code,is larger than the length (horizontal size in horizontal writing, forinstance) of each line set as a horizontal size of the image-formingarea for the character strings, automatic start of a new line is carriedout at the position of a character corresponding to the end of thepredetermined horizontal size of the image-forming area. Of course, ifthere is not included an arbitrary new line-starting code in the textdata, the automatic start of a new line is carried out on each line at acharacter position corresponding to the end of the set horizontal sizeof the image-forming area.

The same applies to lines. For instance, when arbitrary page breakcodes, which can be inserted into the text (code) data of characterstrings as desired, are contained, the number of lines (line count) ineach page is determined or defined according to the arbitrary page breakcodes. However, when the number of lines up to the arbitrary page breakcode is larger than the number of lines set as the size of theimage-forming area for the character strings, automatic page break iscarried out at the position of a line count corresponding to the end ofthe predetermined vertical size of the image-forming area. Needless tosay, if there is not included an arbitrary page break code in the textdata, the automatic page break is carried out for all of the text dataat the position of each line count corresponding to the lower end of theset vertical size of the image-forming area.

However, there has not been proposed a device for forming an image whichcan meet needs for displaying or printing the summary of contentsrepresentative of all the character strings, within one predeterminedline, a predetermined number of lines, or a predetermined number ofpages, even by omitting part of the contents. In other words, there hasnot been proposed a device, for instance, which is capable of arrangingwithin each line not only a line number or an information number butalso at least an essential portion (e.g. a predetermined number ofcharacters from the head) of a character string or character stringscorresponding to the line number or the information number, andarranging such lines for display or printing. Furthermore, there has notbeen proposed a device which is capable of arranging at least anessential portion (e.g. a plurality of lines from the head of characterstrings) within a predetermined number of lines or pages, and displayingor printing an image representative of all the contents of the characterstrings within the predetermined number of lines or pages.

In view of these circumstances, the tape printing apparatus 1 accordingto the embodiment is configured such that, if a line of a characterstring has characters in excess of a predetermined number of characters,the excessive characters of the character string are omitted, or if atext comprised of a plurality of lines of character strings has lines inexcess of a predetermined number of lines, the excessive lines areomitted. When characters or lines are omitted, the apparatus 1 isfurther capable of producing an elided image by adding an image thatnotifies the user of the omission to the image of remaining charactersor lines. In the following, an elided image-forming process for formingsuch as elided image will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.27A to 28B, etc.

First, in the tape printing apparatus 1, it is possible to produce anelided image which is suitable for arranging on each line acorresponding information number (in this embodiment, music number) andessential element (predetermined number of characters from the head) ofa character string corresponding to the information number (musicnumber), and arranging such lines for display or printing.

Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 27A, let it be assumedthat the text data area 242 stores sufficient character (code) data forforming a print image comprised of a title (which may be regarded as thetitle of music number 0 (representative of all music pieces)) and themusic numbers and music titles of a total of 45 music pieces.

In the tape printing apparatus 1, various functions can be set (see FIG.19), including a function to set a “automatic new line-starting format”.The automatic new line-starting format is initially set or configured to“NL-ON” (automatic new line start-ON format), whereby in this state orsetting, if the option “DISC” is selected, for instance, a print imagecorresponding to the above mentioned character codes, such as the printimage described above with reference to FIG. 27B, is produced forprinting.

In a state where this initial setting is maintained, for instance, asshown in FIG. 29, a music title (in the example illustrated in thefigure, the music title “Someday” of the music number “2”) is displayedon the display screen 41 (see FIGS. 2 and 9) in the basic entry mode,and indicators 4 i 01 and 4 i 11 (see FIGS. 9 and 10) are lighted(displayed), which indicate the settings of “new line-starting formats”for continuing a title and each music title by starting a new line(“TITLE NL-START” and “MUSIC NL-START”) (G61: G41 in FIG. 24 also showsthe same state).

In the above state (G61), when the above-mentioned character codes areavailable, and at the same time when the option “DISC” is selected, aprint image, such as the FIG. 27B print image, is produced. If the userdepresses the format key 34FS from this state, as shown in FIG. 29, aconfiguration screen for setting the “automatic new line-startingformat” can be displayed in the function-selecting/setting mode.

When the format key 34FS is depressed, the tape printing apparatus 1first displays the present setting in the function-selecting/settingmode, that is, in the above example, the “NL-ON” (automatic new linestart-ON format) (G62).

When the cursor key 33 is operated in this state (G62), the option“NL-ON” for activating the automatic new line-starting format and anoption “NL-OFF” for inactivating the automatic new line-starting formatare displayed, alternately. When the delete key 35 is depressed in thesestates (G62 to G63), the display screen returns to the basic entry mode(G61).

After displaying a desired one of the options “NL-ON” and “NL-OFF” (inthe illustrated example, “NL-OFF” is displayed) (G63), by depressing theenter key 38, the desired one (here, “NL-OFF” (automatic new linestart-OFF format)) can be set. That is, for instance, when the enter key38 is depressed in the state of the option “NL-OFF” being displayed, thetape printing apparatus 1 sets the “automatic new line-starting format”to the updated state of the “automatic new line-staring format-OFF”,followed by returning to the display screen in the basic entry mode(G64).

In this case, the character display block 4 c (see FIG. 9) returns tothe screen in the basic entry mode (to display the music title “Someday”of the music number “2”), while as to the indicators 4 i 01 and 4 i 11the indicator 4 i 11 for indicating the setting of the automatic newline-starting format (MUSIC NL-START) for continuing each music title bystarting a new (continued) line is turned off, but the indicator 4 i 01for indicating the setting of the format (TITLE NL-START) for continuinga title by starting a new (continued) line remains lighted. In short,the setting of the MUSIC NL-START is canceled (G64).

It should be noted that in the basic entry mode, after the user causingthe title (disc title) to be displayed (in the state of “D” beingdisplayed in the sub-display block), by depressing the format key 34FSand operating keys as described above, the user can cancel the settingof the automatic new line-starting format for the title (TITLENL-START). In this case, the indicator 4 i 01 is turned off. Of course,by operating keys similarly to the above to display the option “NL-ON”and depressing the enter key 38 (in the state of G62, for instance), theautomatic new line-starting formats for the title and music titles canbe configured again.

According to the tape printing apparatus 1, in the state of the option“NL-OFF” being displayed (in the illustrated example, the “NL-OFF” formusic titles), and at the same time in a state where the sufficientcharacter (code) data for forming a print image comprised of a title(which is regarded as the title of music number 0 (representative of allmusic pieces)) and the music numbers and music titles of a total of 45music pieces is available (stored in the text data area 242), if theoption “DISC” is selected, a print image (print image data), such as theFIG. 28A print image, is produced, whereas if the option “CASE” isselected in the same state as described above, a print image (printimage data), such as the FIG. 28B print image, is formed.

In the following, the print image-forming process carried out e.g. inthe above case of the option “DISC” being selected will be describedwith reference to FIG. 28A. Actually, for purposes of edit and checking,a display image (text data for producing the display image) is firstformed (this display image-forming process will be described later) andthen, a print image for printing is created by using (the text data for)the formed display image. However, in order to understand the meaning ofthe display image, description is first made of the print image-formingprocess, more particularly, of the concept or idea thereof, in disregardfor the processing order.

As described hereinbefore with reference to FIGS. 27A and 27B, first,the text data of a character string (basic character string having oneor more lines of character strings each including one or morecharacters) for processing is stored. In the FIG. 27A example, the textdata area 242 stores the sufficient character (code) data for formingthe print image comprised of the title (music number 0 (representativeof all music pieces)) and the music numbers and music titles of a totalof 45 music pieces.

Next, it is determined whether or not the number of the characters ofeach line is larger than a predetermined character count. In theillustrated example, the predetermined character count is assumed to beset to eleven (exclusive of characters for music numbers) as shown inFIGS. 27A and 27B.

It should be noted that generally the size of an image-forming area orthe like is calculated by dots (hereinafter referred to as “dot size”),so that what we call herein the predetermined character count is thenumber of characters arranged on each line of the basic characterstring, assuming that each character has a size of the present setting.More specifically, it is the count or number of characters each assumedto have a size of the present setting and be arranged such that the sumtotal of dot numbers is adapted to the horizontal dot size of the editimage area. Therefore, if the dot size of each character is changedaccording to whether the character is of full-size or of half-size,enlarged or reduced in size or the like, or according to kinds ofcharacter decoration (for instance, outline (hollow), italic, etc.), thepredetermined character count is also changed.

In the above example, the number of the characters of the title “⋆TITLE”(corresponding to the title of music number “0”: formed by sevencharacters including a first space forward of the symbol ⋆) on the firstline is smaller than the predetermined character count (11), and hencethe title is arranged on one line, regardless of whether or not theautomatic new line-starting format of the title is set or ON, but, forinstance, when the title is “⋆TITLEtitle” (formed by 12 charactersincluding the first space), if the TITLE NL-START is set, that is, ifthe “NL-ON” (automatic new line start-ON format) is set for the title, aprint image is formed such that when it is printed, the line iscontinued by starting a new line after printing the characters“⋆TITLEtitl” to print the last character “e” on the second line.

On the other hand, for instance, in the case of the characters“⋆TITLEtitle” (formed by 12 characters) being the title, if the TITLENL-START is not set, that is, if the “NL-OFF” (automatic new linestart-OFF format) is set for the title, it is determined that the numberof characters of the title exceeds eleven (the predetermined count).Then, the number of characters of a character omission-notifyingcharacter string (here, assumed to be formed of one character or symbol“ · · · ”, for instance) for notifying the user of omission of one ormore characters from the line is subtracted from the above predeterminedcharacter count (11), and based on a predetermined post-omissioncharacter count (10) calculated by the subtraction, an elided characterstring “⋆TITLEtit” is formed in which characters in excess of thepost-omission character count (10) are omitted from the line (here, theline for the title) of the basic character strings.

Then, the character omission-notifying character string “ · · · ”(formed by one character or symbol in this case) is added to the elidedcharacter string “⋆TITLEtit” to thereby form an elided basic characterstring “⋆TITLEtit · · · ”. In the illustrated example, however, thetitle is “⋆ TITLE” (seven characters) as described above, and hence thecharacter string “⋆TITLE” as a basic character string is set to thefirst line of the elided basic character strings (see line number “1” inFIG. 28A).

Next, the music title on the second line of the text data, that is, themusic title of information number (music number) “1” is “A1B1C1D1E1F1G1”(14 characters), so that if the MUSIC NL-START is set, that is, if theautomatic new line-starting format is set for each music title(automatic new line start-ON format), a print image is formed such thatthe line is continued by starting a new line after printing thecharacters “A1B1C1D1E1F” to print the characters “1G1” on the next line(see FIG. 27A or 27B).

However, in the present case, the MUSIC NL-START is not set, that is,the “NL-OFF” is set for music titles, so that it is determined that thenumber of characters of the music title exceeds eleven, and the number(one) characters of the character omission-notifying character string (“· · · ”) is subtracted from the predetermined character count (11), andbased on the predetermined post-omission character count (10), thesecond line “A1B1C1D1E1” as an elided character string is formed, inwhich characters in excess of the post-omission character count (10) areomitted from the line (of music number 1) of the basic characterstrings. Then, the character omission-notifying character string (“ · ·· ˜) is added to the second line “A1B1C1D1E1” as the elided characterstring to form the second line ×A1B1C1D1E1 . . . ” (line number “2”shown in FIG. 28A: see music number “1”) of the elided basic characterstrings.

Next, the next music title on the third line of the text data, that is,the music title of information number (music number) “2” is “A2B2C2”(six characters), so that the music title is formed in one line,regardless of whether or not the MUSIC NL-START is set, that is, whetheror not the automatic new line-starting format is set for music titles.Therefore, the character string “A2B2C2” as a basic character string isset to the third line (line number “3” shown in FIG. 28A: see musicnumber “2”) of the elided basic character strings.

Next, the music title on the fourth line of the text data, that is, themusic title of information number (music number) “3” is “A3B3C3D3E3F3G”(thirteen characters), so that if the MUSIC NL-START is set, a printimage is produced such that the line is continued by starting a new lineafter printing the characters “A3B3C3D3E3F” to print the characters “3G”on the next line (see FIG. 27A or 27B). However, since the “NL-OFF” formusic titles is set here, it is determined that the number of charactersof the music title exceeds 11 characters, and the number (one)characters of the character omission-notifying character string (“ · · ·”) is subtracted from the predetermined character count (11), and basedon the predetermined post-omission character count (10), the fourth line“A3B3C3D3E3” as an elided character string is formed in which charactersin excess of the post-omission character count (10) are omitted from theline for music number 3 of the basic character strings. Then, thecharacter omission-notifying character string (“ · · · ”) is added tothe fourth line “A3B3C3D3E3” as the elided character string to form thefourth line “A3B3C3D3E3 . . . ” (line number 4” in FIG. 28A: see musicnumber “3”) of the elided basic character strings.

Next, the next music title on the fifth line of the text data, that is,the music title of information number (music number) “4” is“A4B4C4D4E4F” (eleven characters), so that the music title is formed inone line, regardless of whether or not the MUSIC NL-START is set, thatis, whether or not the automatic new line-starting format is set formusic titles. Therefore, the character string “A4B4C4D4E4F” as a basiccharacter string is set to the fifth line (line number “5” in FIG. 28A:see music number “4”) of the elided basic character strings.

Similarly, the 19th line “A18B18C18D . . . ” (line number “19” in FIG.28A: see music number “18”) of the elided basic character strings isformed, and then, the above notification characters saying that linesare omitted, that is, the line omission-notifying character string “ATOTAL OF 45 TITLES” in the predetermined form for notifying the user ofomission of lines is added to the last 20th line (see line number “20”in FIG. 28A) of the elided basic character strings, followed byterminating the process of forming the elided basic character strings.

After the elided basic character strings are formed, the tape printingapparatus 1 forms an elided image in which images of the elided basiccharacter strings are formed as dot matrix data based on thepredetermined font, and stored in a predetermined image-forming area, inwhich a character image having a predetermined number of characters(eleven characters per line) can be arranged, that is, in the presentembodiment, the predetermined image-forming area secured in the printimage data area 244 in a manner adapted to the label size of the disclabel LMD.

As described above, in the tape printing apparatus 1, the text data ofbasic character strings having one or more lines of character stringseach including one or more characters is stored, and it is determinedwhether or not the number of the characters of each line is larger thana predetermined character count (eleven in the above example). If it isdetermined that the number of characters of a line exceeds thepredetermined character count, the number (one) of a characteromission-notifying character string (“ · · · ”) for notifying the userof omission of one or more characters from each line is subtracted fromthe above predetermined character count, and based on the predeterminedpost-omission character count (10), elided basic character strings areformed in which characters in excess of the predetermined post-omissioncharacter count are omitted from each line of the basic characterstrings. Then, an elided image is formed in which images of the elidedbasic character strings are formed in dot matrix data based on apredetermined font into the predetermined image-forming area in which acharacter image having a predetermined number of characters (elevencharacters) can be arranged.

In the above case, the number of characters of each elided characterstring, that is, the predetermined post-omission character count (10) isequal to a value obtained by subtracting the number (one) of charactersof the character omission-notifying character string (“ · · · ”) fromthe predetermined character count (11). Hence, the number of charactersof each elided basic character string, obtained by adding the characteromission-notifying character string to the elided character string, isprevented from exceeding the predetermined character count.

As a result, according to the tape printing apparatus 1, in basiccharacter strings formed of text data and each comprised of one or morecharacters, if each line of the basic character strings has charactersexceeding in number a predetermined character count, a new characterstring image, in which part of each of the basic character strings isomitted and at the same time a character omission-notifying characterstring for notifying the user of the omission is added, is formed as dotmatrix data based on a predetermined font, and the data is stored in apredetermined image-forming area in which a character image having thepredetermined number or count of characters can be arranged per line,such that the data is properly arranged in the predeterminedimage-forming area, thereby forming an elided image.

In short, on each line of character strings, characters in excess of apredetermined character count can be omitted, and if omitted, it ispossible to form an elided image having an image for notifying the userof the omission as well as the image of the remaining characters.Therefore, according to the tape printing apparatus 1, an elided imagecan be created which is suitable for use in arranging on each line acorresponding information number (music number) and the essentialposition (predetermined number of characters from the head) of acharacter string corresponding to the information number (music number),and arranging such lines for display or printing (see FIGS. 28A and28B).

Although in the tape printing apparatus 1, it is possible to selectwhether or not the title or music title is continued by starting a newline, one of them may be employed in a fixed manner. In such a case, itis not required to provide the settings described above with referenceto FIG. 29.

Further, as described hereinabove, notification characters may be addedto a basic character string in the form of text data (charactercode(s)), thereafter converting the same together with the basiccharacter string to image data (dot-matrix data), or alternatively asdescribed hereinafter, the notification characters may be converted toimage data separately from the basic character string, and then theimage data of the character omission-notifying character string may beadded to the image data of the basic character string.

More specifically, in this case, the tape printing apparatus 1 storesthe text data of basic character strings which have one or more lines ofcharacter strings each including at least one character, and similarlyto the above example, based on the predetermined post-omission charactercount, characters in excess of the predetermined post-omission charactercount are omitted from each line of the basic character strings, to formthe image of each of the remaining characters as dot matrix data basedon a predetermined font, and the data is stored in a predeterminedimage-forming area in which a character image having a predeterminednumber of characters can be arranged, thereby forming an elidedcharacter string image. Further, a character omission-notifyingcharacter string is formed as dot matrix data based on the predeterminedfont and the data is stored in the image-forming area to arrange thesame therein, whereby the image of the character omission-notifyingcharacter string is added to the elided character string image, therebyforming an elided image.

In this case as well, similarly to the above-mentioned example, thenumber of the characters on each line of the character image which isformed as dot matrix data and arranged to form the elided image isprevented from exceeding the predetermined character count. Therefore,also in this case, in basic character strings formed of text data andhaving one or more characters, if each line of the basic characterstrings has characters exceeding in number a predetermined charactercount, a new character string image, in which part of each basiccharacter string is omitted and at the same time the characteromission-notifying character string for notifying the user of theomission is added, is formed as dot matrix data based on thepredetermined font, and the data is stored in the predeterminedimage-forming in which a character image having a predetermined numberor count of characters can be arranged, whereby the elided image can becreated. In short, on each line of each character string, characters inexcess of the predetermined character count can be omitted, and ifomitted, an elided image including an image for notifying the user ofthe omission of characters can be created as well.

Although in the above example, the symbol is used as the characteromission-notifying character string, this is not limitative, but asymbol, such as “ · · ”, “·”, “˜”, “·” or the like, may be employed.Further, for instance, a character string comprised of one or aplurality of characters including one of these symbols may be used asthe character omission-notifying character string. In these cases, sincethe character omission-notifying character string includes one or morecharacters of “ · · · ”, “ · · ”, “·”, “˜” or “·”, it is possible tosuitably represent omission of an image.

Further, according to the tape printing apparatus 1, it is possible tocarry out editing operations, such as character insertion, characterdeletion, character conversion, settings of character sizes or settingsof character decoration. As the result of the editing operations, if thecharacter image of one character is changed in width or the like,resulting in a change in the number of characters arrangeable in thepredetermined image-forming area, the resulting number of characters isset to the predetermined character count with reference to which anelided image is formed. This makes it possible to form an image adaptedto the basic character strings formed by the editing operations.

That is, as described hereinbefore, what we call herein thepredetermined character count is the number of characters arrangeable oneach line of the basic character strings, assuming that each characterhas a size of the present setting. If the dot size of one character ischanged according to whether the character is of full size or of halfsize, enlarged or reduced in size or the like, or according to the kindof character decoration (for instance, hollow, italic, etc.), thepredetermined character count is also changed. In the tape printingapparatus 1, the character count changed according to the change in dotsize is set to the predetermined character count with reference to whichan elided image is formed. This makes it possible to form an imageadapted to basic character strings formed by the editing operations.

Further, as described hereinbefore, according to the tape printingapparatus 1, not only characters in excess of a predetermined count(number) of characters are omitted from a line of a character string toform an elided image, but also lines in excess of a predetermined count(number) of lines are omitted from a plurality of lines of characterstrings. When such lines are omitted, it is possible to form an elidedimage including an image for notifying the user of the omission inaddition to the image of the remaining lines. In other words, an elidedimage can be produced which is suitable e.g. for arranging an essentialportion (a plurality of lines from the head of character strings) withina limit of a predetermined line count or page count to thereby displayor print a representation of the whole contents of the character stringsin a manner adapted to the limit of the predetermined line count or pagecount.

In this process, similarly to the above example, first, after storingtext data of basic character strings, it is determined whether or notthe number of lines of the basic character strings exceeds apredetermined number or count. In the cases of the examples illustratedin FIGS. 27B, 28A, etc. the predetermined line count for a disc label isset to twenty. Further, FIG. 28B shows an example of a case label, inwhich the predetermined line count is set to forty. In the following,description is made by taking the predetermine line count of twenty (fora disc label) as an example.

More specifically, in the tape printing apparatus 1, when it isdetermined that the number or count of lines of the basic characterstrings exceeds the predetermined line count (20), the number of lines(one in this example) of a line omission-notifying character string in apredetermined format (here, “A TOTAL OF XX TITLES”, as described above)for notifying the user of the omission of lines is subtracted from thepredetermined line count (20), and based on a predeterminedpost-omission line count (19), lines in excess of the predeterminedpost-omission line count are omitted from the basic character strings.Then, the line omission-notifying character string (a line of “A TOTALOF XX TITLES”) is added to the remaining lines to form elided basiccharacter strings as new basic character strings. Thereafter, an elidedimage is formed in which images of the elided basic character stringsare formed as dot matrix data based on the predetermined font and storedin the predetermined image-forming area in which a character imagehaving a predetermined line count or number (20) of lines can bearranged.

In the above case, the post-omission line count (19) is obtained bysubtracting the number of lines (one in this example) of the lineomission-notifying character string from the predetermined line count(20), so that even if the line omission-notifying character string isadded, the number of lines of the elided basic character strings isprevented from exceeding the predetermined line count.

Therefore, in the tape printing apparatus 1, in a case where characterstrings are each formed of text data of one or more characters, andbasic character strings are formed by a plurality of lines of thecharacter strings, if the basic character strings have lines is excessof a predetermined line count, an image of new character strings, inwhich lines of the basic character strings are omitted and at the sametime a line omission-notifying character string for notifying the userof the omission is added, is formed in dot-matrix form based on apredetermined font and stored in a predetermined image-forming area inwhich a predetermined number of lines can be arranged to form an elidedimage.

That is, lines in excess of a predetermined line count are omitted frombasic character strings comprised of a plurality of lines of characterstrings and when they are omitted, it is possible to form an elidedimage constituted by an image of the remaining lines and an image of acharacter string for notifying the user of the omission. Therefore,according to the tape printing apparatus 1, an elided image can beproduced, which is suitable e.g. for arranging an essential portion (aplurality of lines from the head of character strings) within a limit ofa predetermined line count or page count to thereby display or print arepresentation of the whole contents of the character strings in amanner adapted to the limit of a predetermined line count or page count.

It should be noted that when lines are omitted, similarly to the case ofthe omission of characters from a line, character codes of notificationcharacters (line omission-notifying character string) may be added tocharacter codes of basic character strings, and the whole charactercodes can be converted to dot matrix data representative of an imageincluding the image of a line omission-notifying character string, oralternatively as described hereinafter, the character codes ofnotification characters (line omission-notifying character string) maybe converted to image data (dot matrix data) representative of the imageof the line omission-notifying character string separately fromcharacter codes of the basic character strings, and then the image data(dot matrix data) of the line omission-notifying character string may beadded to the image data (dot matrix data) of the image of the basiccharacter strings.

In this case, the tape printing apparatus 1 stores basic characterstrings which have a plurality of lines of character strings each formedof text data of one or more characters, and similarly to the aboveexample, based on the post-omission line count, lines in excess of thepost-omission line count are omitted from the basic character strings,and an image (image data) of each character on the remaining lines isformed as dot matrix data based on a predetermined font and stored inthe predetermined image-forming area in which data of an image having apredetermined number of lines of characters can be arranged, therebyforming an elided character string image. Further, the predeterminedline omission-notifying character string is formed as dot matrix dataand stored in the image-forming area based on the predetermined font,whereby the image of the line omission-notifying character string isadded to the elided character string image to form an elided image. Thatis, in this case as well, similarly to the above-mentioned example, thenumber of lines of a character image formed as dot matrix data andarranged to form an elided image is prevented from exceeding thepredetermined line count.

Therefore, in this embodiment as well, in a case where character stringsare each formed of text data of one or more characters, and basiccharacter strings are formed by a plurality of lines of the characterstrings, if the basic character strings have lines in excess of apredetermined line count, an image of new character strings, in whichlines of the basic character strings are omitted and at the same time aline omission-notifying character string for notifying the user of theomission is added, is formed in dot matrix form based on a predeterminedfont and stored in a predetermined image-forming area in which, apredetermined count or number of lines can be arranged, to form anelided image. That is, lines in excess a predetermined line count of areomitted from basic character strings comprised of a plurality of linesof character strings and when they are omitted, it is possible to forman elided image constituted by an image of the remaining lines and animage for notifying the user of the omission.

Further, in the tape printing apparatus 1, when a plurality of lines ofbasic character strings include music titles of a plurality of musicpieces stored in an MD (disc) 92 and some of the plurality of lineswhich include one or more music titles of the plurality of music piecesare omitted, characters designating the number of a total of all themusic pieces stored in the MD (disc) 92 or the number of music piecesomitted are included in a line omission-notifying character string (“ATOTAL OF XX TITLES” or “XX OTHER TITLES”, described above). Therefore,if the user views one of the number of all the music pieces and thenumber of omitted music pieces represented by the lineomission-notifying character string, and the number of music pieceswhose titles or the like are formed and presented as images, he can knownot only the fact that there are some music pieces whose images areomitted but also the other of the number of all the music pieces and thenumber of omitted music pieces.

Although the tape printing apparatus 1 according to the embodiment isconstructed such that a display image displayed on the display screen 41is formed independently of a print image and the elided image describedabove is used as the print image for printing, it goes without sayingthat the above elided image may be used as the display image.

However, when an elided image as described above is formed for displayor printing, once the elided image is formed, it is difficult to checkmodified portions of original character strings. In other words, forinstance, when portions of the characters or lines of the originalcharacter strings are deleted, the range of characters or lines whichcan be included in a predetermined line, a predetermined number of linesor a predetermined number of pages is changed. As a result, it isrequired to modify locations (characters or lines) or the like whichshould be omitted. In this case, if the elided image alone is displayedor printed, it is impossible to grasp characters or lines omitted in theelided image (which should be restored through modification as a resultof the deletion). This makes it difficult to carry out the modificationof the original character strings.

On the other hand, when not an elided image but the whole of an image(whole image) is formed without omitting any positions thereof,automatic start of a new line or automatic page break or the like iscarried out according to the horizontal size (the number of characterson one line) and vertical size (the number of lines) of a page set forthe edit image-forming memory area for editing the whole image, asdescribed above, which makes it difficult to grasp an original imagerepresentative of the lines of the character strings. This also makes itdifficult to grasp an image representative of each line or page of anelided image to be formed later.

To eliminate such an inconvenience, the tape printing apparatus 1 iscapable of forming an edit information image which enables the user tograsp character overflow positions at which characters overflow fromeach line, such as omission positions or new line start positions in anedit image, while reflecting thereon an original image representative ofeach line of character strings. The edit information image is producedbefore forming an edit image, such as an elided image produced byomitting portions of lines of character strings and forming dot matrixdata such that the elided image becomes an image of character stringseach formed of one line, or a whole image formed without omitting anypart of each character string. Alternatively, the edit information imageis produced separately or independently of the forming of the editimage. In the following, the edit information image will be described indetail with reference to FIGS. 27A to 32.

First of all, as shown in FIG. 30, in the tape printing apparatus 1 aredefined three kinds of display-only characters exclusively used fordisplay. The display-only characters are a line overflow mark 1 (firstpredetermined line overflow-notifying character string), a line overflowmark 2 (second predetermined line overflow-notifying character string),and a character overflow mark (character overflow-notifying characterstring), which are marks formed by using letters of “L1”, “L2” and “C”,respectively, as shown in the figure. Hence, hereinafter, they are alsosimply referred to as a “mark L1”, a “mark L2” and a “mark C”.

Now, the meaning and use of these three kinds of display-only characterswill be described. The meaning and use of the “mark C” will be describedfirst, and the “mark L1” and the “mark L2” will be described later.

The mark C is, so to speak, a character overflow-notifying characterstring indicative of an excess of the number of characters of acharacter string over a predetermined character count. Morespecifically, in the tape printing apparatus 1, character strings forprocessing, as described above with reference to FIGS. 27A and 27B, forinstance, are stored, and it is determined whether or not the number ofcharacters on each line of basic character strings exceeds apredetermined character count (eleven in the above-mentioned example).If it is determined that the number of characters on the line of thebasic character strings exceeds the predetermined character count (11),the mark C (character overflow-notifying character string) is insertedbetween a character immediately before the predetermined line count (11)is exceeded and a character immediately after the same is exceeded. Thusa display character string (edit information character string) is formedin the form of a basic character string including the mark C. Then, thedisplay character string (edit information character string) isconverted based on a predetermined font to dot matrix data which isstored in the display image data area (edit information image-formingmemory area) 243 for arrangement therein, to thereby produce a displayimage (edit information image).

The meaning and use of the mark C is described in more detail. Forinstance, assuming that the text data described hereinabove withreference to FIGS. 27A and 27B is set to the basic character strings,the 11th line on the text data corresponding to the 17th and 18th linesin FIG. 27A is formed by character codes representative of the musictitle “A10B10C10D10E10F1” of the information number (music title) “10”.

In this case, in the tape printing apparatus 1, as shown in FIG. 31A,the mark C is inserted between an 11th character “1” (central character“1” of a character string “D10”) and a 12th character “0” (lastcharacter “0” of the character string “D10”), and the character stringis displayed on the display screen in a manner such that the insertionof the mark C is reflected as it is. That is, FIGS. 31A to 31D representthe display character strings of the text data (character codes), and atthe same time represent display images formed based on the charactercodes.

On the other hand, as described above, a print image formed from theoriginal basic character strings is shown in FIG. 27A or 27B. Forinstance, if the print image representative of the music title“A10B10C10D10E10F1” of the information number (music title) “10” on the17th to 18th lines is compared with the display image (representative ofthe display character strings) of a FIG. 31A music title “A10B10C10D1┌C┘ 0E10F1” with the mark C inserted therein (the inserted mark is shownby characters ┌C┘ for convenience of description), it is clear that theposition of the mark C corresponds to a position from which a new lineis automatically started.

That is, in the tape printing apparatus 1, if the number of charactersadjusted to the horizontal size (for instance, in the direction of thelength of each line in horizontal writing) of the print image data area(edit image-forming memory area) 244 for producing a print image (editimage), such as an elided image or a whole image, is set to apredetermined line count (eleven in the above example), the mark C(character overflow-notifying character string) is inserted into adisplay character string (edit information character string) between acharacter immediately before the predetermined line count (11) isexceeded and a character immediately after the same is exceeded, thatis, at a position where automatic start of a new line is carried out, sothat the character image of the mark C is positioned at a locationcorresponding to the automatic start of the new line in a display image(edit information image) represented by dot matrix data formed byconverting the character codes of the display character string includingthe mark C to respective dot matrix data item and arranging the dataitems.

Therefore, if the display image (edit information image) thus formed isdisplayed, the user can grasp new line start positions (characteroverflow positions) in the print image (edit image) from the displayimage (edit information image). Further, although in the above example,the character overflow-notifying character string is inserted when it isdetermined that the number of characters on a line of basic characterstrings exceeds the predetermined character count, this is notlimitative, but if the apparatus is configured such that the characteroverflow-notifying character string can be arbitrarily inserted,similarly to the case of general arbitrary new line start capability,freedom of edit can be increased to thereby enhance operability of theapparatus.

Further, as described above, in the tape printing apparatus 1, it ispossible to select whether or not a title or a music title should becontinued by starting a new line. If the “NL-OFF” (automatic new linestart-OFF format) is set, the number (one) of characters in the abovepredetermined character omission-notifying character string (the symbol“ · · · ” in the above example) is subtracted from the predeterminedcharacter count (11), and based on the predetermined post-omissioncharacter count (10) resulting from the subtraction, the mark C(character overflow-notifying character string) is inserted.

The sum of the predetermined post-omission character count (10) and thenumber (one) of characters of the predetermined characteromission-notifying character string (“ · · · ”) is equal to thepredetermined character count (11). In other words, when the number ofcharacters adapted to the horizontal size of the disc label (whichcorresponds to the edit image-forming memory area), for instance, is setto the predetermined character count (11), the inserting position atwhich the mark C (character overflow-notifying character string) isinserted becomes an omission position applied when an elided image isformed in which portions of lines of the basic character strings areomitted and at the same time the predetermined characteromission-notifying character string (“ · · · ”) for notifying the userof the omission is added to the respective lines.

The meaning and use of the mark C is described in further detail. Let itbe assumed that the text data described above with reference to FIGS.27A and 27B is set to the basic character strings, and the “NL-OFF” isset for music titles (MUSIC NL-START is OFF). As shown in FIG. 31B, forinstance, the mark C is inserted between the 10th character “D” (thefirst character “D” of the character string “D10”) and the 11thcharacter “1” (the central character “1” of the character string “D10”)in the character codes of the above music title “A10B10C10D10E10F1” ofthe information number (music title) “10”. The music title is displayedon the display screen as it is, that is, with the image of the mark Cinserted therein.

On the other hand, when the “NL-OFF” is set for music titles, the printimage formed from the original basic character strings is shown in FIG.28A or 28B, as described hereinbefore. When comparison is made betweenthe print image of the music title “A10B10C10D . . . ” of theinformation number (music number) “10” on the 11th line in FIG. 28A andthe display image (the image of a display character string) of a FIG.31B music title “A10B10C10D ┌C┘ 10E10F1” with the mark C insertedtherein, it is clear that the position of the mark C corresponds to theomission position after which excessive characters are omitted.

As will be understood from the above, if a display image (editinformation image) formed is displayed, when the automatic newline-starting format is set (to carry out automatic start of a newline), the user can grasp new line start positions (character overflowpositions) in a print image (edit image) from the display image (editinformation image), whereas when the automatic new line-starting formatis inactive, the user can grasp omission positions (character overflowpositions).

Actually, as described above, in the tape printing apparatus, forpurposes of edit and checking, a display image (or text data forproducing the display image) is first formed and then, a print image iscreated by using the formed display image (or text data thereof).

The use of the mark C is described more specifically. In the tapeprinting apparatus 1, the mark C (character overflow-notifying characterstring) and the following characters on each corresponding line of theabove display character strings (edit information character strings) areomitted to form an elided character string, and the characteromission-notifying character string (“ · · · ”) is added to each linesubjected to the omission to thereby produce elided basic characterstrings. Then, image data (dot matrix data) representative of the imageof the elided basic character strings is formed based on a predeterminedfont and stored in a predetermined print image data area (editimage-forming memory area) 244 in which a character image having apredetermined number of characters (for instance, eleven characters inthe above example) can be arranged, to thereby form a print image(elided image).

That is, when the automatic new line-starting format is set (to carryout automatic start of a new line), each mark C (characteroverflow-notifying character string) inserted into the display characterstrings (edit information character strings) represents new line startpositions (character overflow positions) in a print image (edit image),whereas when the automatic new line-starting format is not set, eachmark C represents an omission position (character overflow position), sothat when the automatic new line-starting format is set, lines arecontinued by starting new lines at the position of the mark C, or whenthe automatic new line-starting format is not set, the mark C and thefollowing characters on each line are omitted to add a characteromission-notifying character string (“ 19 · · ”) to each line, wherebyit is possible to form a print image (edit image) from the displaycharacter string (or to produce character strings for use in forming theprint image).

Therefore, according to the tape printing apparatus 1, not only adisplay image (edit information image) but also a print image (elidedimage), in which portions of lines of the basic character strings areomitted and at the same time a character omission-notifying characterstring for notifying the user of the omission is added to acorresponding line, can be easily produced based on the above displaycharacter strings (edit information character strings).

Of course, even when a display image (edit information image) or a printimage (elided image) is formed based on the display character strings(edit information character strings), as the result of editingoperations, if the character image of one character is changed in widthor the like to change the number of characters arrangeable in thepredetermined image-forming area, the resulting number of characters isset to the predetermined character count to form the display image (editinformation image) or the print image (elided image), so that it ispossible to form an image adapted to basic character strings modified bythe editing operations.

Although it is also possible to form an image equivalent to the abovedisplay image as a print image for printing, if such an image isproduced as a display image, the following merits can be particularlyexploited. Assuming, for instance, that there are provided displaycharacter strings as in FIG. 32A, by displaying the display characterstrings as a display image, the user can check portions thereof throughoperating the cursor key 33 (G65 to G68: portions surrounded by brokenlines are undisplayed portions). Further, it is possible to preventpredetermined undesirable edit operations (for instance, an operation todelete display-only characters, such as the mark L1 and the like), anddisplay an error message (G69), which makes the display image suitablefor edit operations.

Similarly, it is also possible to edit or check, for instance, thedisplay character strings described above with reference to FIGS. 31A to31D. Especially when an edit image, such as an elided image describedabove or a whole image, is to be formed into a print image, characteroverflow positions in the print image (edit image) where charactersoverflow from each line, corresponding e.g. to omission positions or newline start positions, can be checked before printing by displaying acorresponding display image (edit information image). As a result, if itis determined that edit operations, such as modification and the like(e.g. restoration of omitted characters), are required, edit operationscan be carried out with ease, since each character of the overall basiccharacter strings including characters omitted (especially a characterto be restored as a result of the modification) can be viewed.

Further, as clearly shown in FIGS. 31A to 32B, in the tape printingapparatus 1, the display image (edit information image) is formed byconverting character codes of the basic character strings to dot matrixdata and arranging the data such that each line of display characterstrings (edit information character strings) corresponds to each line ofthe basic character strings, and is displayed as an image of a line of acharacter string. Hence, it is possible to form a display image (editinformation image) which reflects thereon original images of lines ofthe basic character strings.

Further, it is preferred that the character overflow-notifying characterstring includes a mark, such as a special mark specially registered as anonstandard character, which can be easily distinguished from othercharacters, that is, which can be clearly discriminated from othercharacters when the user checks each edit information image, and enableshim to easily grasp character overflow positions. By taking theseadvantageous effects into account, the tape printing apparatus 1according to the present embodiment uses a mark shaped after thecharacter “C”, that is, the mark C, so as to permit the user toassociate it with character overflow.

Further, it is preferred that an edit information image is formed byconverting only a required range of text data (character codes) of editinformation character strings to dot matrix data and arranging the data,for display or printing. More specifically, only a display range of theedit information image to be displayed on the display screen, forinstance, is formed, and as characters displayed disappear in accordancewith the scroll of the display range, dot matrix data representative ofan image of new characters is formed and arranged for display, wherebyit is possible to shorten a time period from a time point of the startof an edit information image-forming process to a time point of checkingthe resulting edit information image. Further, it is only required toallocate a memory area for displaying the display screen as the editinformation image-forming memory area, so that the capacity of thememory device can be saved. Also when such an edit information image isused for making a print image, it is only required to sequentially formranges of dot matrix data necessitated by respective printingoperations, and hence the same advantageous effects as described abovecan be obtained.

Similarly to forming an edit information image, which enables the userto easily grasp a whole of an elided image formed by omitting portionsfrom lines of character strings, it is preferable to form an editinformation image which enables the user to grasp a whole of an elidedimage formed by omitting several of a plurality of lines of characterstrings. Hence, the tape printing apparatus 1 is designed to have aninventive feature that provides this capability.

More specifically, the tape printing apparatus 1 is capable of formingan edit information image which enables the user to grasp line overflowpositions which designate omission positions for use in setting thenumber of lines of the edit image to a predetermined line count equal toa positive integral multiple of a reference line count, while reflectingthereon an original image representative of each line of characterstrings. The edit information image is produced before forming an editimage, such as an elided image which is produced by omitting some of aplurality of lines of character string, adding an omission notifyingcharacter string to the character strings in place of the omitted lines,and forming the dot matrix data of the resulting character strings suchthat the whole image is comprised of a predetermined number of linesequal in number to a positive integral multiple of the reference linecount. Alternatively, the edit information image is produced separatelyor independently of the forming of the edit image. In the following, theprocess for forming the edit information image will be described indetail with reference to FIGS. 27A to 33.

As described above with reference to FIG. 30, in the tape printingapparatus 1 are defined as display-only characters the mark L1(lineoverflow mark 1: first predetermined line overflow-notifying characterstring) and the mark L2 (line overflow mark 2: second predetermined lineoverflow-notifying character string) as well as the mark C (characteroverflow mark: character overflow-notifying character string).

The mark L1 and the mark L2 are, so to speak, line overflow-notifyingcharacter strings each designating an excess of lines over apredetermined line count. The mark L1 is the first predetermined lineoverflow-notifying character string designating an excess of a linecount (the number of lines) over a first predetermined line count (thenumber of lines for the disc label, in an example describedhereinbelow), while the mark L2 is the second predetermined lineoverflow-notifying character string designating an excess of a linecount (the number of lines) over a second predetermined line count (thenumber of lines for the case label, in an example describedhereinbelow).

That is, in the tape printing apparatus 1, there are defined a referenceline count and one or more n-th predetermined line counts eachcorresponding to a number n (n represents a natural number) times aslarge as the reference line count. These line counts are used forforming dot matrix data of a predetermined portion or all of the linesof character strings (the above basic character strings) for processing,as described above with reference to FIGS. 27A and 27B, for instance,based on a predetermined font and storing the data in an editimage-forming memory area (similarly to the above example, an edit imageis used as a print image, and an area for forming the image is allocatedin the print image data area 244).

To be more specific, description will be made of a case where twopredetermined reference line counts (n=1, 2) are defined. In this case,one of the predetermined reference counts (i.e. the first predeterminedline count) used for making a disc label is set to twenty, while thesecond predetermined line count used for making a case label to forty.

When dot matrix data of each character of the basic character strings isformed for storage in the edit image-forming memory area, if the numberof lines of the basic character strings is determined to exceed one ofthe n-th predetermined line counts, the n-th predetermined lineoverflow-notifying character string which designates the excess of oneof the n-th predetermined line count is inserted between the end of aline immediately before a n-th post-omission line count is exceeded andthe head of the following line, i.e. a line positioned immediately afterthe n-th post-omission line count is exceeded. Then, the resultingcharacter strings are edit information character strings dot matrix dataof which is formed based on the predetermined font and arranged in theedit information image-forming memory area, to thereby produce an editinformation image.

It should be noted that the term “n-th post-omission line count” is usedto mean the line count obtained by subtracting the number of lines ofthe n-th predetermined line omission-notifying character string fornotifying the user of the omission of lines from the n-th predeterminednumber.

More specifically, in the case of the above example, the n-thpredetermined line omission-notifying character string is “XX OTHERTITLES” or “A TOTAL OF XX TITLES”. In the case of the former, a first(n=1) predetermined line omission-notifying character string and asecond (n=2) predetermined line omission-notifying character string arenecessarily different from each other (in the portion of “XX”, that is,in the number of remaining music pieces), whereas in the case of thelatter, the first and second predetermined line-notifying characterstrings are identical to each other. Both of the two notifying characterstrings are each formed of one line. Further, as described above,according to the present embodiment, the latter predetermined lineomission-notifying character string “A TOTAL OF XX TITLES” ispreferentially used.

In the case of the latter notifying character string being used, thefirst post-omission line count=the first predetermined line count(20)−the number (one) of lines of the first predetermined lineomission-notifying character string (“A TOTAL OF XX TITLES”)=19, whilethe second post-omission line count=the second predetermined line count(40)−the number (one) of lines of the second predetermined lineomission-notifying character string (“A TOTAL OF XX TITLES”)=39 (seeFIGS. 28A and 28B).

More specifically, when dot matrix data of each character of the basiccharacter strings is formed and arranged in the print image data area(edit image-forming memory area) 244, if the number of lines of thebasic character strings is determined to exceed the first predeterminedline count (20) or the second predetermined line count (40), the mark L1(first predetermined line overflow-notifying character string) or themark L2 (second predetermined line overflow-notifying character string)designating the excess of the number of lines (line count) over thefirst predetermined line count (20) or the second predetermined linecount (40) is inserted between the end of a line immediately before thefirst post-omission line count (19) or the second post-omission linecount (39) is exceeded, and the head of the following line, i.e. a linepositioned immediately after the first post-omission line count (19) orthe second post-omission line count (39) is exceeded. The resultingcharacter strings are edit information character strings (used asdisplay character strings for display, similarly to the above example),and dot matrix data of the display character strings (edit informationcharacter strings) is formed based on the predetermined font andarranged in the display image data area (edit information image-formingmemory area), to thereby produce a display image (edit informationimage) for display.

In this case, needless to say, the sum of the first post-omission linecount (19) and the number (one) of the lines of the corresponding firstpredetermined line omission-notifying character string is equal to thefirst predetermined line count (20). Similarly, the sum of the secondpost-omission line count (39) and the number (one) of lines of thecorresponding second predetermined line omission-notifying characterstring is equal to the second predetermined line count (40).

In other words, as shown in FIG. 27A and corresponding FIG. 31A, andFIG. 28A and corresponding FIGS. 31B to 31C, the inserting position ofthe mark L1 (first predetermined line overflow-notifying characterstring) in this case is provided at an omission position which is usedin forming an elided image by omitting some of the lines (20th line et.seq.) of the basic character strings and adding the image of the firstpredetermined line omission-notifying character string (“A TOTAL OF XXTITLES”) for notifying the user of the omission, such that the wholeimage is formed of lines corresponding in number to the firstpredetermined line count (20).

Further, as shown in FIG. 28B and corresponding FIGS. 31B to 31D, theinserting position of the mark L2 (second predetermined lineoverflow-notifying character string) in this case is provided at anomission position which is used in forming an elided image by omittingsome of the lines (40th line et. seq.) of the basic character stringsand adding the image of the second predetermined line omission-notifyingcharacter string (“A TOTAL OF XX TITLES”) for notifying the user of theomission, such that the whole image is formed of lines corresponding innumber to the second predetermined line count (40).

Accordingly, by displaying a display image (edit information image) thusformed , the user can grasp each omission position with reference towhich an elided image (edit image) is formed such that the number oflines thereof is equal to the first predetermined line count or thesecond predetermined line count (each predetermined line countcorresponding to a number n (n represents a natural number) times aslarge as the reference line count ). Although in the present embodiment,display character strings are used for producing a display image, itgoes without saying that the same can be employed for creating a printimage for printing the same contents as displayed.

In general, in the above case, the sum of each nth post-omission linecount and the number of lines of a corresponding n-th predetermined lineomission-notifying character string is equal to the n-th predeterminedline count. That is, the inserting position of the n-th predeterminedline overflow-notifying character string in this case is provided at anomission position which is used in forming an elided image by omittingsome of the lines of the basic character strings and adding the image ofthe n-th predetermined line omission-notifying character string fornotifying the omission in place of the omitted lines. The resultingelided image represented by a dot matrix data is formed such that thewhole image is formed of lines corresponding in number to the n-thpredetermined line count.

As a result, by displaying or printing the edit information image thusformed, the user is capable of grasping each omission position (lineoverflow position) with reference to which an elided image (edit image)is formed such that the elided image is formed of lines correspond innumber to the n-th predetermined line count (predetermined line countequal to a positive integral multiple of a predetermined reference linecount).

Further, a plurality of types of predetermined line count are defined asthe n-th predetermined line count which varies with different values ofthe natural number n. Although it is also possible to set the number oflines of the n-th predetermined line omission-notifying character stringto different values from each other depending on the value of thenatural number n, in the tape printing apparatus 1, the n-thpredetermined line omission-notifying character string are set to thesame number of lines irrespective of the value of each natural number n.This enables an identical value to be used as the number of lines of then-th predetermined line omission-notifying character string, which makesit possible to simplify a process for inserting each n-th predeterminedline overflow-notifying character string, that is, creation of an editinformation character string.

Further, in the tape printing apparatus 1, it is possible to form notonly a display image (edit information image) but also a print image(edit image: elided image) by using display character strings (editinformation character strings).

More specifically, as described above with reference to FIGS. 24 to 26,any of the disc label, the case label and the side label can be selectedto form a print image of a print size adapted to the size of the labelselected, so that if the disc label is selected, the first predeterminedline count (20) can be set as a predetermined line count, whereas if thecase label is selected, the second predetermined line count (4) can beset as a predetermined line count.

Therefore, in the tape printing apparatus 1, when the disc label isselected (i.e. the first predetermined line count is set), lines ofdisplay character strings (edit information character strings) arrangedafter the mark L1 (first predetermined line overflow-notifying characterstring) are omitted to form elided character strings. Then, to theelided character strings formed is added the character string “A TOTALOF XX TITLES” (first predetermined line omission-notifying characterstring) to produce elided basic character strings. Thereafter, dotmatrix data representative of the image of the elided basic characterstrings is formed based on a predetermined font, and arranged in theprint image data area (edit image-forming memory area) 244, therebyforming an elided image.

On the other hand, when the case label is selected (i.e. the secondpredetermined line count is set), lines of display character strings(edit information character strings) arranged after the mark L2 (secondpredetermined line overflow-notifying character string) are omitted toform elided character strings. Then, to the elided character stringsformed is added the character string “A TOTAL OF XX TITLES” (secondpredetermined line omission-notifying character string) to produceelided basic character strings. Thereafter, dot matrix datarepresentative of the image of the elided basic character strings isformed based on a predetermined font, and arranged in the print imagedata area (edit image-forming memory area) 244, thereby forming anelided image.

That is, by using display character strings (edit information characterstrings), it is possible to form not only a display image (editinformation image) but also a print image (edit image: elided image), inwhich some of the lines of the basic character strings thereof areomitted but at the same time a character string for notifying the userof the omission is added, and the resulting character strings areconverted to dot matrix data arranged such that the image represented bythe dot matrix data is comprised of images of lines corresponding innumber to a predetermined line count which is a number n times as largeas a reference line count (wherein, n represents a natural number).

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, it is determined at step S71which of the disc label, the case label, and the side label is selectedor designated. If it is determined at step S71 that the side label isselected, a print image of a title (disc title) is formed for printingat step S72.

Further, if it is determined at step S73 that the disc label isselected, it is determined at step at step S74 whether or not thedisplay character strings include a mark L1. If the mark L1 is includedor exists (Yes to S74), a print image is formed for a first main labelLM such that the first main label LM is fully printed up to the 20thline with the notification character string “A TOTAL OF XX TITLES”(first predetermined line omission-notifying character string) added as20th line of the main label LM at step S75

On the other hand, when no mark L1 is included or exists (No to S74),even if a print image corresponding to all of display character stringsis produced, the first main label LM is not fully printed up to the 20thline, so that a print image is created without omitting any lines of thebasic character strings for printing at step S76. Moreover, as describedhereinabove, in the case of the notification image “A TOTAL OF XXTITLES” being added, even if the print image is printed without omittingany lines, the resulting printed image is not degraded in appearance.Hence, the tape printing apparatus 1 may be configured such that thenotification image is printed (i.e. a print image is formed as much)when no lines are to be omitted, provided that there is no printing datafor the 20th line.

Further, when the case label is selected at step S77, first, it isdetermined at step S78 whether or not a first main label LM is to beprinted. If the first main label LM is determined to be printed (Yes toS78), next, it is determined at step S79 whether or not a mark L1isincluded or exists (this determination step may be omitted, since thestep is not necessary for processing character strings for the firstmain label). If the mark L1 is included (Yes to S79), a print image isformed for the first main label LM such that the first main label isfully printed up to the 20th line. In this case, the case label isselected, and there is another main label (second one) to be printed, sothat a print image without the notification image “A TOTAL OF XX TITLES”is produced for printing at step S80.

On the other hand, when the display character strings do not include amark L1 (No to S79), even if a print image corresponding to all ofdisplay character strings is produced, the first main label LM is notfully printed up to the 20th line, so that the print image is createdwithout omitting any lines of the basic character strings, for printingat step S76.

Further, it is determined at step S78 whether or not the first mainlabel LM is to be printed. When the first main label LM is not to beprinted, that is, when the second main label is to be printed (No toS78), next, it is determined at step S81 whether or not a mark L1isincluded or exists. If no mark L1is included (No to S81), the printingoperation has already been completed when printing on the first mainlabel is finished, so that there is no print image produced, and noprinting operation is carried out on the second main label.

On the other hand, when the second main label is to be printed (No toS78), and when the a mark L1is included (Yes to S81), next, it isdetermined at step S83 whether or not a mark L2 is included. When nomark L2 is included (No to S83), even if a print image corresponding toall of display character strings is produced, the second main label LMis not fully printed up to the 40th line (20th line of the secondpiece), so that the print image is created without omitting any lines ofthe basic character strings for printing at step S84.

When the second main label is determined to be printed (No to S78), andwhen the mark L1is included (Yes to S81), as well as when there is themark L2 is included (Yes to S83), a print image is formed for the secondmain label LM such that the second main label is fully printed up to the20th line, with the notification character string “A TOTAL OF XX TITLES”(second predetermined line omission-notifying character string) beingadded as the 20th line at step S85.

As described above, in the tape printing apparatus 1, by using displaycharacter strings (edit information character strings), it is possibleto form not only a display image (edit information image) but also aprint image (edit image: elided image), in which some of the lines ofthe basic character strings thereof are omitted, but at the same time acharacter string for notifying the user of the omission is added, andthe resulting character strings are converted to dot matrix dataarranged such that the image represented by the dot matrix data iscomprised of images of lines corresponding in number to a predeterminedline count which is a number n (n=1, 2) times as large as a referenceline count (20).

Further, in the above example, all the n-th predetermined lineomission-notifying character strings for use in producing an elidedimage are the same character string (“A TOTAL OF XX TITLES”), so thatonly one type of character string is required to be available as then-th predetermined line omission-notifying character string.

Furthermore, in the tape printing apparatus 1, there are definedpredetermined information numbers (music titles) corresponding torespective lines of basic character strings. The information numbers(music titles) are only required to correspond to respective lines ofthe basic character strings. They are not required to correspond torespective lines in a print image (edit image) formed by forming dotmatrix data of the basic character strings and arranging the dot matrixdata in the print image data area (edit image-forming memory area) 244.

In other words, regardless whether an arbitrary one line of the basiccharacter strings is formed into one line of character string, or into aplurality of lines of character string e.g. by automatic start of a newline, a character string notifying the total number of pieces ofinformation (total number of music pieces) is formed as the n-thpredetermined line omission-notifying character string. Therefore, bydisplaying or printing an elided image, the user is capable of graspingthe number of pieces of information recorded in unomitted lines (numberof unomitted music pieces) and the number of all pieces of information(number of all music pieces), from which he can further know the fact ofomission of lines, and the number of pieces of information recorded inthe omitted lines (number of omitted music pieces).

Although in the above example, the n-th predetermined lineomission-notifying character strings for use in producing elided imagesare all set to the same character string (“A TOTAL OF XX TITLES”), theycan be set to different character strings (“XX OTHER TITLES”, forinstance) such that a suitable character string is applied to each n-thpredetermined line omission-notifying character string.

Further, when a predetermined information number (music number)corresponding to each line of the basic character strings is determined,by setting the character string (“XX OTHER TITLES”, for instance) fornotifying the number of pieces of information (number of music pieces)recorded in omitted lines to the n-th predetermined lineomission-notifying character string, the user is capable of knowing thefact of omission of lines, the total number of pieces of information(total number of music pieces) and so forth from the number of pieces ofinformation (number of music pieces) recorded in unomitted lines and thenumber of pieces of information (number of music pieces) recorded inomitted lines.

Although the same image as the above display image (edit informationimage) can be formed as a print image for printing, the forming of suchan image as the display image permits the advantageous effects thereofto be particularly exploited. Especially when an edit image, such as theabove elided image and the like, is formed as a print image, an omissionposition (line overflow position) in the print image (edit image) can bechecked before printing by displaying the display image (editinformation image). As a result, if it is determined that editoperations, such as modification and the like (e.g. restoration ofomitted characters), are required, edit operations can be carried outwith ease since the overall basic character strings including each lineand each character omitted (especially a line to be restored, as aresult of the modification) can be viewed.

Further, as clearly shown in FIGS. 31A to 32B, in the tape printingapparatus 1, a display image (edit information image) is produced byforming and arranging images of the basic character strings such thateach line of display character strings (edit information characterstrings) corresponds to each line of the basic character strings, andsuch that each line of display character strings (edit informationcharacter strings) is formed as a line of a character string image.Hence, the display image (edit information image) reflects thereonoriginal images of respective lines of the display character strings.

Further, it is preferred that the n-th predetermined lineoverflow-notifying character string includes a mark, such as a specialmark specially registered by nonstandard character registration, whichcan be easily distinguished from other characters. If such a mark isincluded, when the edit information character string is displayed (thisis also the case when it is used in printing), the user can clearlydiscriminate the mark from other characters during checking an editinformation image, and easily grasp a line overflow position. In thisembodiment, the mark L shaped after the character “L” is employed suchthat the user can associate it with line overflow. It should be notedthat a mark shaped after a character “P” may be used to cause the userto associate it with page overflow.

Further, in the tape printing apparatus 1, the mark L1 (1st (n=1)predetermined line overflow-notifying character string) includes acharacter (number) teaching that n=1, which shows that the predeterminedline count is as large as the predetermined reference line count.Further, the mark L2 (2nd (n=2) predetermined line overflow-notifyingcharacter string) includes a character (number) teaching that n=2, whichshows that the predetermined line count is twice as large as thepredetermined reference lines. That is, the n-th predetermined linecount corresponds to a number n times as large as the predeterminedreference line count, and hence if only the user views the n-thpredetermined line overflow-notifying character string including acharacter teaching the natural number n, he can understand that theomission position is a position for use in setting the number of linesof an elided image (edit image) to the predetermined line count n timesas large as the predetermined reference line count.

Further, if the print images (edit images, elided images) describedabove with reference to FIGS. 27A to 28B are compared with thecorresponding display images (edit information images) described abovewith reference to FIGS. 31A to 32B, it is clear that in the tapeprinting apparatus 1, print images and corresponding display images aredifferent from each other in some points other than the above insertionof various notification character strings described above. In short, thetape printing apparatus 1 as an image forming device is configured suchthat it realizes various kinds of ideas other than those describedhereinabove.

The word processors or the like, referred to hereinbefore, have a largedisplay screen, so that they are capable of displaying an imagerepresentative of a print image to be printed, as it is, on a displayscreen without any inconveniences. On the other hand, among small-sizedand inexpensive electronic apparatuses, such as a tape printingapparatus, a stamp making apparatus, and the like, there are some whichhave so small display screens that they can display only a small numberof lines (one line, for instance) or only part of the line(s). The sameapplies to the tape printing apparatus 1 according to the presentembodiment (see FIGS. 9 to 12E, etc.). In these apparatuses, in order todisplay a maximum range of display image data on a small-sized displayscreen, half-size characters are usually used for display.

For instance, characters, such as alphanumeric characters, Japanese Kanaletters (Hiragana letters and Katakana letters) and the like, arerelatively simple in construction, so that if they are displayed in halfsize, they can be properly recognized as respective characters on thedisplay screen. That is, characters, such as alphanumeric ones and thelike, having relatively simple constructions, can be displayed in halfsize (half-size display characters), and by using half-size displaycharacters, a relatively wide range of information can be displayed evenon a small-sized display screen.

On the other hand, to display characters having complicatedconstructions, such as Kanji letters, symbols, figures and the like, ina half size-adapted display area of a small-sized screen, it is requiredto use a display screen which is capable of displaying characters havinga high density (high resolution: high dot number), resulting inincreased cost. This makes it impossible to fulfill the requirement ofreduction of the manufacturing costs of the apparatuses. Therefore, inthe small-sized and inexpensive electronic apparatuses of theabove-mentioned kind, a small-sized display screen having a lowresolution is employed. This holds true with the tape printing apparatus1 according to the present embodiment, which provides a resolution of16×16 dots for each full-size character and a resolution of 8 (width)×16(length) dots for each half-size character (see FIGS. 11A to 12E).

This makes it impossible to display characters having complicatedconstructions, such as Kanji letters, symbols, figures and the like, inhalf size, or even if it is possible to display the same, they aredifficult to recognize. That is, characters complicated in construction,such as Kanji letters and the like, can be displayed only in full size(full-size display characters). Therefore, it is impossible to displaycharacter strings including full-size display characters only in halfsize.

To eliminate this inconvenience, the tape printing apparatus 1 isconfigured such that it is capable of forming a display image (imagedata thereof) permitting efficient display of character stringsincluding full-size display characters, such as Kanji letters, and aprint image (image data thereof) permitting such character strings to beprinted with a neat appearance. In the following, a display image/printimage-forming process will be described in detail with reference toFIGS. 32A and 32B and FIGS. 34A and 34B.

First, characters represented by character codes for conversion to dotmatrix data of half-size character images and arranged as such duringthe display image-forming process to a display image for display on thedisplay screen are defined as “half-size display characters”, whilecharacters represented by character codes for conversion to dot matrixdata of full-size character images and arranged as such during the sameprocess are defined as “full-size display characters”. Each of all thecharacters which can be converted to dot matrix data based on apredetermined font is determined to be a half-size display character ora full-size display character.

More specifically, characters complicated in construction, such as Kanjiletters, symbols, figures and the like, are determined as full-sizedisplay characters, and the other characters are defined as half-sizedisplay characters. Although the above marks L1, L2 and C are alsofull-size display characters, they are not used in forming a printimage, since they are display-only characters and are not included inoriginal character strings.

In the tape printing apparatus 1, the text data of the basic characterstrings described above with reference to FIGS. 27A and 27B, forinstance, are stored and then, it is determined as to each character ofthe basic character strings whether the character is a half-size displaycharacter or a full-size display character. If the character isdetermined to be half-size display character, a display image isproduced by converting a character code for the character to dot matrixdata, and arranging the data in a display image data area (predetermineddisplay image-forming area) 243, as a half-size character image, whereasif it is determined to be a full-size display character, a display imageis produced by converting a character code for the character to dotmatrix data, and arranging the data in the display image data area, as afull-size character image.

In short, full-size display characters that can be displayed only infull size are displayed in full size, whereby it is possible to displaycharacter strings including full-size display characters, such as Kanjiletters, while half-size display characters that can be displayed inhalf size are displayed in half size. This enables a display image to bedisplayed as efficiently as possible even on a small-sized displayscreen.

In this case, if a print image corresponding to a display image isformed just as it is displayed on the display screen and printed (thatis, a print image having full-size display characters and half-sizedisplay characters mixed with each other, similarly to the displayimage, is formed and printed), for instance, if a FIG. 34A print imageis formed according to the FIG. 32A display image and printed), a stringor sequence of characters look irregular between lines (i.e. theleft-side ends and right-side ends of characters corresponding inposition between lines are not aligned), resulting in the degradedappearance of a printed image.

Therefore, in the tape printing apparatus 1, as shown in FIG. 34B, aprint image is formed by forming and arranging each character in thebasic character strings as a full-size character image regardless ofwhether the character is a half-size display character or a full-sizedisplay character. This makes it possible to produce a display imagesuitable for efficiently displaying character strings includingfull-size display characters, such as Kanji letters, on a small-sizeddisplay screen, and a print image suitable for printing the characterstrings with attractive appearance.

Further, in the above case, the display image is formed by convertingcharacter codes of only characters within a range of the basic characterstrings required for display to dot matrix data for arrangement. Morespecifically, for instance, only a display image within a display rangeon the display screen is produced such that as a portion of the displayimage disappear in accordance with the scroll of the display range,images of new characters are additionally formed, i.e. only requiredpart of the display image is formed, whereby it is possible to shorten atime period from the start of the display image-forming process to thechecking of the display image formed and the like. Further, it is onlyrequired to secure a display image-forming area for displaying the partof the display image for display on the display screen, so that thecapacity of the memory device can be saved or reduced.

Similarly, the print image is formed by converting character codes ofonly part of the basic character strings required for printing to dotmatrix data, and arranging the data. That is, in this case, it is onlyrequired that portions of the print image required for printing aresequentially created in accordance with the printing process, so thatsimilarly to the case of the display image being produced, it ispossible to shorten a time period from the start of the printimage-forming process to the printing of the print image. Further, it isonly required to secure a print image-forming area for use in printingonly the part of the print image required to be printed, which enablesthe capacity of the memory device to be saved or reduced.

Further, in the tape printing apparatus 1, the font data defining apredetermined font includes data for forming an image of each characterof the half-size display characters as a full-size character image, anddata for forming an image of each character of the half-size displaycharacters as a half-size character image. Therefore, as to each ofcharacters of the basic character strings for which a character image isto be formed, if the character is a half-size display character, afull-size character code for the character is converted to a half-sizecharacter code and then, by using the converted half-size charactercode, an image of the character can be formed based on the predeterminedfont as a half-size character image.

On the other hand, if the character whose image is to be formed is afull-size display character, by using a full-size character codetherefor, an image of the character can be formed based on thepredetermined font as a full-size character image. Through the processesdescribed above, it is possible to produce a display image suitable forefficiently displaying character strings including full-size displaycharacters, such as Kanji letters and the like, on a small-sized displayscreen.

Although in the above embodiment, a full-size character code for usewith a half-size display character is converted to a half-size charactercode to form an image of the half-size display character by using theconverted half-size character code, this is not limitative, but in thecase where a half-size display character is to be formed, it is possibleto form an image of such a character by another method, for instance, bycarrying out a half-size character image-forming process for directlyforming an image of the character as a half-size character image. Inthis case, a half-size display character can be directly formed as ahalf-size character image, while a full-size display character can bedirectly formed as a full-size character image, whereby it is possibleto produce a display image suitable for efficiently displaying characterstrings including full-size display characters, such as Kanji lettersand the like, on a small-sized display screen.

Generally, outline font is defined by the coordinates and attributes ofcontour lines or the like of each character image. Hence, the dot matrixof a character image having a desired size can be obtained by simplycarrying out conversion from the character codes, regardless of thecharacter size thereof. That is, reference font data is expanded orreduced in size by calculation to form a character image. Therefore, aneat enlarged or reduced image can be formed by converting the charactercode again to a desired size of an image of the character.

Hence, in the above half-size character image-forming process, forinstance, when a half-size display character whose image is to be formedis a character which can be formed based on the outline font, byadapting a horizontal dot size to which an image of the character is tobe formed to a half size, and simply forming an image of the characterto this size, it is possible to form a half-size character imagecorresponding to the half-size display character whose image is to beformed.

Further, in the half-size character image-forming process, for instance,when a half-size display character whose image is to be formed is acharacter which can be formed based on a dot font or a predetermined andregistered dot matrix, by reducing the horizontal dot size of acharacter image of the character to a half size, it is possible to forma half-size character image corresponding to the half-size displaycharacter whose image is to be formed based on the dot font or the dotmatrix.

As described above, the tape printing apparatus 1 is designed to haveinventive features for producing a display image for display and a printimage for printing, and further, it has other inventive features fordisplaying characters as well as converting and inputting the same.These features will be described hereinafter in further detail. Now, inthe following, a problem concerning the actual printing process and amethod of solving the problem will be summarized. That is, the tapeprinting apparatus 1 as an image printing device for printing a desiredimage by using a print head in a predetermined printing area of a printmaterial will be described hereinafter.

Generally, in an image printing device for printing a desired printimage having character images arranged therein as image elements,predetermined margins are set above and below or on the left-hand sideand the right-hand side of a printing area (for one page, for instance)having a predetermined size. The character images are image ofcharacters of character strings each including one or more characters,such as letters, numerals, symbols, simple figures and the like.

For instance, in a word processor or the like, predetermined verticaland horizontal margins are set on a print material (paper of a fixedsize (A4 or the like)) and then, a portion exclusive of the margins isset to a predetermined printing area for each page for printing (a printimage) thereon. Further, if desired margins cannot be obtained due tovariations in a position at which paper (print material) is set(mounted), and feed of the paper by a paper feed mechanism, the usercarries out adjustment of the printing area by viewing results ofprinting and configuring the margins again.

Further, in the word processor or the like, normally, the direction ofreciprocation (movement) of the print head and the direction of feedingof paper are orthogonal to each other, so that the left-side margin andthe right-side margin are adjusted according to a print start positionand a print end position in the direction of reciprocation of the printhead (for instance, direction of a sequence of characters or along aline in horizontal writing) respectively, while a top margin and abottom margin are adjusted according to a print start position and aprint end position in the direction of feeding of the paper,respectively. In short, by adjusting the print start/end position by thefeed control of the print head and the printing paper (print material),respectively, desired margins can be obtained.

However, in a particular kind of printing apparatus, such as a tapeprinting apparatus, there is a type having a fixed print head. In such aprinting apparatus, only the print start/end positions along thedirection of feeding of the printing object (e.g. tape) can be adjustedby the feeding control, and hence only the front margin and the rearmargin (corresponding to the top and bottom margins in the case of theword processors or the like) can be adjusted but lateral margins alongthe width of the tape (corresponding to the left and right margins inthe case of the word processors or the like) cannot be adjusted.

To eliminate this inconvenience, the tape printing apparatus 1 accordingto the embodiment is capable of printing the print material byrelatively moving a print head having a plurality of dot elementsarranged in a predetermined one of vertical and horizontal directionsfor printing, and a print material, in a direction orthogonal to thepredetermined direction, as well as adjusting a printing position in thepredetermined direction. In the following, the printing and adjustmentprocesses will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 35A to 46.

Similarly to the case of FIGS. 4A and 4B, assuming that the tape T isfed from right to left (see FIGS. 36A to 36C), and that for instance, ahatched area, shown in FIG. 35E, which is located between the tworeference holes TH, described above with reference to FIG. 4A, formed atpredetermined space intervals in the tape T for making a main label, isa reference range (hereinafter, the position of this range is referredto as “the reference positions”). Then, if the printing position isdisplaced upward, the print image is printed as shown in FIG. 35B,whereas if the printing position is displaced downward, the print imageis printed as shown in FIG. 35H.

Similarly, FIG. 35D shows a case where the printing position isdisplaced forward (leftward) from the reference position, and FIG. 35Fshows a case where the printing position is displaced rearward(rightward) from the reference position. The other figures, i.e. FIGS.35A, 35C, 35G and 35I show combined displacements of the printingposition in the upward/downward and forward/rearward(leftward/rightward) directions. Among the above displacements, thedisplacement in the forward/rearward (leftward/rightward) directioncorresponds to the print start/end position in the direction of feedingof the tape T, which can be adjusted by the feed control (describedhereinafter with reference to FIGS. 26, 47, etc.). Accordingly, in thefollowing, the adjustment of displacement in the upward and downwarddirections as viewed in FIGS. 35A to 35I (in the direction of the widthof the tape T: hereinafter, this direction is referred to as “thepredetermined direction”) will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 36A to 36C, in the tape printing apparatus 1, thedirection of arrangement of the print head 7 (direction of a line ofdots, i.e. direction of a sequence of dot elements for printing pixeldots) and the direction of feeding of the tape T are orthogonal to eachother. Further, the head width Hw of the print head 7 in thepredetermined direction is large enough to arrange 288 dot elementsthereon, which enables maximum 288 dots (width of 36 mm) to be printed.The main label LM, which is formed in the tape T having a width Tw=46 mmby half die cutting, has a width of 36 mm (288 dots) in thepredetermined direction, and out of the width of 36 mm, a width of 32 mm(256 dots) is defined as an actual printing range in the predetermineddirection (see FIG. 39B).

Accordingly, in the tape printing apparatus 1, by using the 256 dotelements (some of a plurality of (288) dot elements) of the print head(print head formed by arranging the plurality of (288) dot elements in apredetermined direction (in a predetermined direction of the verticaland horizontal directions: vertical direction in this embodiment)) 7, aprint image having e.g. 256 dots (the number of dots in thepredetermined direction, smaller than the maximum printable number ofdots, 288, in the predetermined direction) is printed on a tape (printmaterial) T, while moving the tape T relative to the print head 7 (ormoving at least one of the print head and the tape (print material) Trelative to the other in a direction orthogonal to the predetermineddirection).

In the tape printing apparatus 1, to print a print image in the area ofa half-die-cut label on the tape (print material) T for making e.g. amain label LM, the range of use of 255 (a plurality of) dot elements isshifted in a predetermined direction (predetermined one of the verticaland horizontal directions), whereby a printing position of the printimage is adjusted in units of one or more dots.

Images representative of examples of adjustment of a printing positionin this embodiment are shown in FIGS. 37A to 37C. As shown in thefigures, if the maximum dot number in the predetermined directionprintable by the print head 7 is eleven, and if, at the referenceposition, the print image is printed by using seven dots at the centralportion of a line of dots exclusive of two dots on the upper sidethereof and two dots on the lower side thereof, as shown in FIG. 37A, byshifting the printing position upward by one dot for adjustment, asshown in FIG. 37B, printing is carried out by using seven dots exclusiveof one dot on the upper side of the dot line and three dots on the lowerside thereof. If the printing position is adjusted downward by one dot,as shown in FIG. 37C, printing is carried out by using seven dotsexclusive of three dots on the upper side of the dot line and one dot onthe lower side thereof.

Therefore, for instance, when an actual printing position is displacedupward as shown in FIG. 36A, the range of use of dots, that is, theprinting position is adjusted downward, whereas when the actual printingposition is displaced downward as shown in FIG. 36C, the printingposition is adjusted upward, whereby the print image can be printed atthe reference position, as shown in FIG. 36B.

Next, a change to be made to printing control of data for being sent toeach dot element of the print head 7 when the printing position isadjusted, that is, a data control process for controlling the data forbeing sent to each dot element of the print head 7 when a printingposition adjustment is made by a method described hereinafter will bedescribed.

Referring to FIGS. 38A to 38E, assuming that the maximum dot number inthe predetermined direction printable by the print head 7 is 40, andthat as shown in FIG. 38A, at the reference position, printing iscarried out by using 24 dots at the central portion of a line of dotswithout using eight dots on the upper side thereof and eight dots on thelower side thereof, an example will be considered which a data item[0055FFAA00] HEX (hereinafter, hexadecimal is referred to as [˜] HEX) issent to all the 40 dots (in hexadecimal).

In this process, to adjust the printing position upward by one dot, itis only required that a data item [00ABFF5400] HEX (see FIG. 38B) issent to the print head 7, and to adjust the printing position upward bytwo dots, it is only required that a data item [0157FEA800] HEX (seeFIG. 38C) is sent to the print head 7. Further to adjust the printingposition upward by three dots, it is only required that a data item[02AFFD5000] HEX (see FIG. 38D) is sent to the print head 7. Inversely,to adjust the printing position downward by one dot, it is only requiredthat a data item [002AFF5500] HEX (see FIG. 38E) is sent to the printhead 7.

Next, a manner of setting adjustment values for adjusting the printingposition by the tape printing apparatus 1 will be described. As shown inFIGS. 39A and 39B, the tape printing apparatus 1 employs the print head7, which is capable of printing 288 dots in the predetermined direction.

Out of the 288 dots (of a dot line) in the print head 7, 276 dots (dotelements) arranged at the central portion of the dot line are employedfor printing and position adjustment. The other 12 dots of the 288 dots,i.e. six dots from the upper end of the dot line and six dots from thelower end thereof are not used here (see FIG. 39B). Through theadjustment of the printing position, the printing position can beadjusted or shifted to any of 21 positions in units of one or more dots(by an adjustment amount of one or more dots) in a range between aposition of 256 dots (corresponding to 32 mm: −10 dots) exclusive of 20dots from the upper end of the dot line, and a position of 256 dots(corresponding to 32 mm: +10 dots) exclusive of 20 dots from the lowerend of the dot line, with a central position of 256 dots (correspondingto 32 mm: reference position of ±0 dot) exclusive of 20 dots, i.e. 10dots from the upper end of the dot line and 10 dots from the lower end.

FIGS. 40A and 40B show examples of the vertical adjustment of theprinting position (“MAIN V”: main vertical) executed when the main labelis selected. FIG. 40A shows an image representative of print data (mark▪ shown in the figure) in the reference position of ±0, and FIG. 40Bshows an image representative of the print data in the adjustmentposition of +10 (dots). Similarly, FIGS. 41A and 41B show examples ofthe horizontal adjustment of the printing position (“MAIN H”: mainhorizontal) executed when the main label is selected. Through thehorizontal adjustment, the printing position can be adjusted or shiftedto any of 31 positions in a range of −15 to +15.

The same adjustment of the printing position can be carried out on theside label. FIGS. 42A and 42B show examples of the vertical adjustmentof the printing position (“SIDE:V”: side vertical) executed when theside label is selected. Through the vertical adjustment, the printingposition can be adjusted or shifted in units of one or more dots to anyof 21 positions in a range of −10 to +10. Similarly, FIGS. 43A and 43Bshow examples of the horizontal adjustment of the printing position(“SIDE:H”: side horizontal) executed when the side label is selected.Through the horizontal adjustment, the printing position can be adjustedor shifted in units of one or more dots to any of 31 positions in arange of −15 to +15.

Referring to FIG. 44, to set the above adjustment values, the userdepresses the adjustment key 34DS in the basic entry mode, whereby it ispossible to display the screen of “DENSITY” for setting the density ofdisplay in the function-selecting/setting mode (see FIG. 19) (G72). Whenthe up arrow key 33U or the left arrow key 33L is depressed in thisstate (G72), the indicator display block is flickered for caution atstep S71, followed by returning to the screen of “DENSITY” (for settingthe density of display: G72) after the lapse of a predetermined timeperiod. When the enter key 38 is depressed, the screen is changed to amenu screen under the option “DENSITY” for selecting one from options ofadjusting the density of display (S72). However, these options are notdirectly related to the present embodiment, and hence descriptionthereof is omitted. When the delete key 35 is depressed in the state ofthe above menu screen at the lower level in hierarchy being displayed,the screen returns to the immediately preceding screen (G72).

On the other hand, when the down arrow key 33D or the right arrow key33R is depressed in the state of the screen of “DENSITY” being displayed(G72), the screen of “POSITION” for setting a printing position (G73) isdisplayed. When the up arrow key 33U or the left arrow key 33L isdepressed in this state (G73), the display screen returns to the stateof the immediately preceding screen of “DENSITY” (G72). Further, whenthe down arrow key 33D or the right arrow key 33R is depressed in thestate of the option “POSITION” being displayed (G73), the indicatordisplay block is flickered for caution (S71), followed by returning tothe screen of “POSITION” (settings of density of display: G73) after thelapse of the predetermined time period.

Further, when the enter key 38 is depressed in the above sate (G73), thescreen is changed to a first level (highest level in hierarchy) of amenu for selecting options of adjusting the printing position (S73).When the delete key 35 is depressed at the first level, the screenreturns to the immediately preceding state (G73).

Referring to FIG. 45, when the enter key 38 is depressed in the state ofthe option “POSITION” being displayed (G73), the screen is changed tothe first level of the printing position-adjusting menu. Initially, acandidate or menu option selected and finally determined on animmediately preceding occasion of this process for setting the printingposition (here, it is assumed that an option “MAIN V” was selected) isdisplayed (G75).

Thereafter, whenever the down arrow key 33D or the right arrow key 33Ris depressed, the screen is switched to display options in the order of“MAIN V”→“MAIN H”→“SIDE:V”→“SIDE:H” (G75 to G78). When the down arrowkey 33D or the right arrow key 33R is further depressed in the state ofthe option “SIDE:H” being displayed (G78), the indicator display blockis flickered for caution at step S80, followed by returning to theimmediately preceding state after the lapse of the predetermined timeperiod (G78).

Further, whenever the up arrow key 33U or the left arrow key 33L isdepressed from the state of the option “SIDE:H” being displayed (G78),the options are displayed in the order of “SIDE:H”→“SIDE:V”→“MAINH”→“MAIN V” (G75 to G78). When the up arrow key 33U or the left arrowkey 33L is further depressed in the state of the option “MAIN V” beingdisplayed (G75), the indicator display block is flickered for caution atstep S79, followed by returning to the immediately preceding state afterthe lapse of the predetermined time period (G75).

Further, when the enter key 38 is depressed in the state of any of theoptions “MAIN V”, “MAIN H”, “SIDE:V” and “SIDE:H” being displayed (G75to G78), the screen is changed to a second level (second highest level)under the option selected at one of the steps S75 to S78. When thedelete key 35 is depressed at the second level, the screen returns tothe immediately preceding state (G75 to G78). In the following,description is made of an example in which the enter key 38 is depressedin the state of the option “SIDE:V” being displayed (G77), therebydisplaying the second level menu under this option at step S77.

Referring to FIG. 46, when the enter key 38 is depressed in the state ofthe option “SIDE:V” being displayed (G77), first, the present state ofsettings or configuration is displayed. Here, it is assumed by way ofexample that a configuration screen “SIDE:±00” which is an initial stateof the configuration is displayed at step S83.

Whenever the up arrow key 33U is depressed from the above state (S83),the screen is switched to display options in the order of “SIDE:↑01”,“SIDE:↑02”, “SIDE:↑03”, . . . , “SIDE:↑10” (G82 to G81). When the uparrow key 33U is further depressed in the state of the option “SIDE:↑10”being displayed, the indicator display block is flickered for caution atstep S81, followed by returning to the immediately preceding state afterthe lapse of the predetermined time period (G81).

Further, whenever the down arrow key 33D is depressed from the state ofthe option “SIDE:↑10” being displayed, the screen is switched to displayoptions in the order of “SIDE:↑09”, “SIDE:↑08”, . . . , “SIDE:↑02”,“SIDE:↑01”, “SIDE:±00”, “SIDE:↓01”, “SIDE:↓02”, . . . , “SIDE:↓10” (G81to G83 to G85). When the down arrow key 33D is further depressed in thestate of the option “SIDE:↓10” being displayed, the indicator displayblock is flickered for caution at step S81, followed by returning to theimmediately preceding state after the lapse of the predetermined timeperiod (G81).

Further, when the enter key 38 is depressed in the state of any of theoptions ranging from “SIDE:↑10” via “SIDE:±00” to “SIDE:↓10” (G81 to G83to G85), the printing position is set to a value corresponding to thedisplayed one in the screen, followed by returning to the screen in thebasic entry mode (G86: the same as G71 in FIG. 44).

For instance, when the enter key 38 is depressed in the sate of theoption “SIDE:↑10” being selected, the printing position is adjusted to“+10” (shifted upward by 10 dots) by the vertical adjustment of theprinting position in the sate of the side label being selected. Further,when the option “SIDE:±00” is selected, the printing position is set toan initial position without shifting the same, whereas when the option“SIDE:↓10” is selected, the printing position is adjusted to “−10”(shifted downward by 10 dots).

In short, the user selects one of the above options by operating the uparrow key 33U or the down arrow key 33D, and depresses the enter key 38,whereby he (she) can adjust or shift the printing position in units ofone or more dots to any of 21 positions in a range of −10 to +10 in thevertical direction.

If an option other than the option “SIDE V” is selected in the state ofthe first level being displayed, described above with reference to FIG.45, another kind of adjustment of the printing position can be carriedout similarly. For instance, when the enter key 38 is depressed in thestate of the option “SIDE:H” (G78) being displayed, the screen ischanged to the second level under the option “SIDE:H”, so that at thesecond level corresponding to FIG. 46, the user can selectively displaythe screens of “SIDE:←15” (the printing position is shifted forward(leftward) by 15 dots) via “SIDE:±00” to “SIDE:→15” (the printingposition is shifted rearward (rightward) by 15 dots) by operating theleft arrow key 33L or the right arrow key 33R. Then, by depressing theenter key 38, he (she) can adjust or shift the printing position inunits of one or more dots to any of 31 positions in a range of −15 to+15 in the horizontal direction (left-right direction).

Similarly, the user can select the option “MAIN V” (G75 in FIG. 45), tothereby adjust or shift the printing position for the main label in unitof one or more dots to any of 21 positions in a range between “MAIN:↑10”(+10) and “MAIN:↓10” (−10) in the vertical direction. Further, the usercan select the option “MAIN H” (G76), thereby adjusting or shifting theprinting position for the main label in units of one or more dots to anyof 31 positions in a range between “MAIN:←15” (+15) and “MAIN:→15” (−15)in the horizontal direction.

A value set in the above adjustment process, if it is the verticalposition adjustment, is used for adjusting data to be sent to the printhead 7 (in the same manner as described above with reference to FIGS.38A to 38E) in the vertical printing position adjustment process(S4821), described above with reference to FIG. 26, whereas if it is forthe horizontal position adjustment, it is used for adjusting pre-printtape feed, which will be described hereinafter with reference to FIG.47, in the side label presence/absence detection & horizontal printingposition adjustment (S4822) to be carried out thereafter.

As described hereinbelow, in the tape printing apparatus 1, by usingsome (256 dots) of the plurality of dot elements (276 of 288 dotelements) of the print head 7 arranged in a predetermined direction(vertical direction in this embodiment), a print image having a dotnumber (256 dots) smaller than the maximum printable dot number (276dots) in the predetermined direction, is printed on a print material(tape T), while moving the print head and the print material relative toeach other (i.e. moving the tape T relative to the print head 7) in adirection orthogonal to the predetermined direction.

In this process, the range (256 dots) of use of the plurality of dotelements is shifted in the predetermined direction, whereby a printingposition for printing the print image is adjusted or shifted in units ofone or more dots by the minimum adjustment amount of one dot. Hence, theprint image can be printed in a predetermined printing area on the printmaterial. Further, it is possible to adjust the printing position in thedirection orthogonal to the predetermined direction, that is, in thedirection of the relative movement, by using a method of controlling therelative movement to adjust a print start/end position.

Further, in the above example, the predetermined printing area is thearea of a half-die-cut label (main label or side label) formed in theprint material (tape T) formed by half die cutting, so that if only theprint image is printed on the half-die-cut label as the predeterminedprinting area and the half-die-cut label is peeled off, a label printedwith a desired print image can be formed. Positions of half-die-cutlabels can also vary (due to manufacturing errors or the like),resulting in displacement of the areas of the half-die-cut labels as thepredetermined printing areas. Even in such a case, printing positionscan be adjusted in a manner adapted to the displaced areas. Further,there are provided a plurality of types of half-die-cut labels, and theprinting position is adjusted according to each of the plurality oftypes of labels. Hence, the printing position can be adjusted in amanner adapted to the type of a half-die-cut label.

Further, in this embodiment, the printing position or the range ofactual use of dot elements is designated in units of one or more dots byusing a dot count with a plus or minus sign which represents anadjustment amount of the printing position with respect to apredetermined reference position. Although in the above example, aninitially set position is set to the predetermined reference position,this is not limitative, but not such a predetermined fixed position butthe present printing position may be set to a reference position todesignate other printing positions with respect to the referenceposition by using a dot count with a plus or minus sign.

Although in the example described above with reference to FIG. 26, thevertical adjustment of the printing position is carried out beforeexecuting the side label presence/absence detection & horizontalprinting position adjustment (S4822), there is no need to carry out thevertical adjustment prior to the execution of this step, but thevertical adjustment may be carried on any time before execution ofprinting at step S502 (for instance, by transmitting an adjustmentamount to the head driver 272).

Further, in the above example, the results of adjustment of the printingposition are used for adjustment or control of data to be sent to theprint head 7. In addition, it is possible to adjust the position of aneffective image range in a print image as well as adjust the range ofuse of the plurality of dot elements (256 dots) of the print head 7.That is, it is possible to form a print image having a dot width of 276dots as the maximum printable dot number, and adjust the position of aneffective (meaningful) part of the image having a width of 256 dots outof the 276 dots, while leaving the other part of the image as a blankimage. Further, if this method is not suitable for saving the capacityof the memory device, only a portion of the print image to be printedimmediately after forming the same may be sequentially formed, therebysaving the capacity of the memory device.

Next, a type-detecting method of detecting the type of an access objectused in the tape printing apparatus regarded as an electronic apparatuswill be described hereinafter. First, the principles of the method aremainly described.

Conventionally, the type-detecting method of detecting the type of anaccess object of the this kind and a device therefor are applied to astamp making apparatus as an electronic apparatus, for instance. In sucha stamp-making apparatus, a stamp body (access object) as a stamp-makingmaterial is formed with a plurality of recesses corresponding to apredetermined pattern for discriminating the type of the stamp body.When the stamp body is mounted in the compartment of the stamp makingapparatus, the pattern of the stamp body is discriminated according tothe plurality of recesses formed in the stamp body by a detecting deviceof a contact type, comprised e.g. of limit switches, arranged on thebottom of the compartment, and based on the detected pattern, the typeof the stamp body mounted is determined.

Further, for instance, in a tape printing apparatus as an electronicapparatus, a tape (access object) as a print material, which iscontained in a tape cartridge corresponding to the type of the tape, ismounted in the compartment of the tape printing apparatus. The tapecartridge is formed with a plurality of recesses similar to those formedin the stamp body, which form a predetermined determination pattern fordetecting the type of the tape loaded or mounted. When the tapecartridge is loaded in the compartment of the tape printing apparatus,the type of the tape cartridge, that is, the type of the tape held inthe tape cartridge can be detected by the same method described above.

However, in the conventional type-detecting method and device fordetecting the type of an access object, in the stamp making apparatus,for instance, when one of various stamp bodies (access objects) havingrespective different shapes is mounted, it is sometimes impossible tonormally detect the type of the mounted stamp body, depending on thetype thereof. This is because when a stamp body is mounted to be broughtinto contact with the above mechanical detecting device comprised e.g.of limit switches, for detection, the stamp body can be so light as tobe lifted up from the compartment, or it can be so small that it cannotproperly face the detecting device.

Further, when a compact and light stamp body is mounted as thestamp-making material, since a stamping face thereof to be formed with astamp is also small in size, it is required to carry out a stamp makingprocess with higher accuracy than when the process is carried out onother stamp bodies larger in size. In other words, when a stamp body(access object) whose stamp has to be made with the highest accuracy ismounted, the type of the stamp body cannot be detected, or even if itcan be detected, the stamp body can be displaced from a predeterminedmounting position thereof due to the contact made for detection,resulting in an increased frequency of occurrence of the mounting error.

The tape printing apparatus also suffers from the problems describedabove. That is, if a tape having a small width and requiring the mostaccurate printing operations is loaded in the compartment in a stateheld in a tape cartridge adapted to the width of the tape, the tapecartridge itself is required to be small in size. Therefore, such a tapecartridge can be so light as to be easily lifted up from thecompartment, or so small that it cannot properly face the detectingdevice, which hinders normal detection of the type of the tape heldtherein, or causes the mounting error to exceed an allowable tolerance.However, if a tape having a small width is held in a large-sized tapecartridge, errors, such as holding errors and feeding errors in feedingthe tape, become conspicuous.

To eliminate the above inconveniences, the tape printing apparatus 1regarded as an electronic apparatus which has one of a plurality oftypes of access objects mounted therein and accesses the mounted accessobject in a manner dependent on the type thereof employs atype-detecting method which is capable of detecting the type of amounted one of access objects which are classified into a plurality oftypes, and minimizing mounting errors in mounting a predetermined typeof access object in the compartment thereof.

Before describing this method, a conventional method will be describedhereafter in the first place. If an access object, such as the stampbody, or an object cartridge, such as the tape cartridge holding a tapeas the access object, is provided with maximum k (k represents a naturalnumber) recesses or the like for discriminating the type of a stamp bodyor tape, it is possible to configure k-bit patterns according to thepresence or absence of each recess. The patterns are discriminated bythe mechanical detecting device, comprised e.g. of limit switches,whereby generally, m (m=k²) types of discrimination can be effected.However, usually, one of the patterns is assigned to a state in which noaccess object is mounted (this state will be referred to hereinafter as“the state of no mounted access object”), so that K-bit patterns areused to effect (m−1) types of discrimination of mounted access objectsand one type of discrimination of the state of no mounted access object,that is, a total of m types of discrimination.

In this case, if there are provided k (=3) recesses for detection, outof k (=3)-bit patterns, that is, out of m=8 (=23) types of patterns [0,0, 0], [0, 0, 1], [0, 1, 0], [0, 1, 1], [1, 0, 0], [1, 0, 1], [1, 1, 0]and [1, 1, 1], one type of a pattern is assigned to the state of nomounted access object, and the other (m−1=7) types of patterns areassigned to seven types of access objects.

The same can be applied to other sets of patterns using another numberof bits. For instance, if there are provided 3 (=m) types of accessobjects, out of 2 (=k)-bits patterns [0, 0], [0, 1], [1, 0] and [1, 1],e.g. [0, 0] is assigned to the state of no mounted access object, andthe other patterns [0, 1], [1, 0] and [1, 1] are assigned to 3 (=m)types of access objects, respectively.

By carrying this idea forward, for instance, in the above case of 3-bitpatterns, if the state of no mounted access object is regarded as aparticular access object and the pattern [0, 0, 0] is assigned to thesame, the patterns [0, 0, 1] to [1, 1, 1] can be assigned to the otherseven types of access objects. Further, if only 4 (=m) types of accessobjects are provided, out of the seven types of patterns [0, 0, 1] to[1, 1, 1] except for the pattern [0, 0, 0] assigned to the state of nomounted access object, any four patterns are assigned to the four typesof access objects.

In the above cases, to determine the presence or absence of any accessobject from a detected pattern, that is, to determine therefrom onlywhether any access object is mounted or not, it is only required e.g. todetermine whether or not the pattern is comprised of all 0's. Thedetermination can be made easily based on a logic circuit or a programof a logical OR operation by determining whether the logical sum ofthree bits of the detected pattern is 1 or 0.

Further, if there are provided four or less types of access objects, todetermine the presence or absence of access objects more easily, apredetermined one of the three bits may be assigned such that the sameindicates the presence or absence of any access object. For instance, ifthe case of the first one (predetermined) bit being 1 is assumed todesignate that any access object is mounted, and the patterns [1. 0, 0],[1, 0, 1], [1, 1, 0] and [1, 1, 1] are assigned to respective patternsfor discriminating four types of access objects, the presence or absenceof any access object can be determined simply by detecting whether thefirst one (predetermined) bit is 1 or 0.

In this case, however, whether or not any access object is mounted isdetermined by the first one (predetermined) bit, so that it isdetermined not only by the pattern [0, 0, 0] but also by the patterns[0, 0, 1], [0, 1, 0], and [0, 1, 1] that no access object is notmounted. In the following, such a pattern is represented by a pattern[0, -, -], wherein the symbol “-” designates a “don't care bit”.

That is, in the above case, four types of patterns [1, 0, 0], [1, 0, 1],[1, 1, 0] and [1, 1, 1] are assigned as patterns for discriminating fourtypes of access objects, in addition to the pattern [0, -, -] forindicating that no access object is mounted.

Further, for instance, when 2 (=m) types of access objects are provided,out of 2 (=k) -bit patterns, a pattern [0, -] is assigned to one forindicating that there is no access object mounted, and patterns [1, 0]and [1, 1] are assigned to ones for discriminating two types of accessobjects, respectively, such that a predetermined bit indicates thepresence or absence of any access object respectively.

Actually, when a method of assigning determination patterns tom (=2^(k))types of access objects is contemplated, if the state of no mountedaccess object as well as the m (=2^(k)) types of access objects aredesired to be detected, it is conceptually natural that 4 (=2²) types ofaccess objects and the state of no mounted access object, for instance,the pattern [0, -, -] is assigned to the state of no mounted accessobject, and the patterns [1, 0, 0], [1, 0, 1], [1, 1, 0] and [1, 1, 1]are assigned to the four (=2²) types, whereas to detect two (=2¹) typesof access objects and the state of no mounted access object, the pattern[0,-] is allocated to the state of no mounted access object, and thepatterns [1, 0] and [1, 1] are assigned to the two types. That is, thispattern assignment method conforms to a naturally or spontaneouslyconceived idea that it is first determined whether or not only accessobject is mounted, and if mounted, the type thereof is discriminated.

In the above cases, if bit patterns for determination of whether or notany access object is mounted and discrimination of a type of the mountedaccess object are described by using a combination of separatelyexpressed respective parenthesis bit-pattern forms, in the case of thefour (=2²) types of access objects and the state of no mounted accessobject being detected, a patterns for detecting the state of no mountedaccess object can be expressed as [0] [-, -], and patterns fordiscriminating the four types can be expressed as [1] [0, 0], [1] [0,1], [1] [1, 0] and [1] [1, 1]. That is, it is determined by apredetermined one bit whether or not only access object is mounted, andif mounted, it becomes effective to discriminate the type of the mountedaccess object by the other two bits. Similarly to the above case of two(=2¹) types of access objects and the state of no mounted access objectbeing detected, a pattern for detecting the state of no mounted accessobject corresponds to [0] [-], and patterns for discriminating the twotypes can be expressed as [1] [0] and [1] [1]. That is, it is determinedby a predetermined one bit whether or not only access object is mounted,and if mounted, it becomes effective to discriminate the types of themounted access object by the other one bit.

Differently from the conventional method, in the type-detecting methodused by the tape printing apparatus 1 for detecting the types of accessobjects, in the above case of the four (=2²) types of access objects andthe state of no mounted access object being detected, the pattern [0, 0,0] is assigned to the state of no mounted access object, and thepatterns [1, 0, 0], [-, 0, 1], [-, 1, 0] and [-, 1, 1] are assigned tothe four (=2²) types. Similarly, when bit patterns for determination ofwhether or not any access object is mounted and discrimination of a typeof the mounted access object are expressed by using a combination ofseparately expressed respective parenthesis, a pattern for detecting thestate of no mounted access object can be expressed as [0] [0, 0], andpatterns for discriminating the four types can be expressed as [1] [00], [-] [0, 1], [-] [1, 0] and [-] [1, 1].

That is, it is not necessarily determined first whether or not anyaccess object is mounted, but it is determined whether or not a mountedaccess object belongs to three of the four types, [-] [0, 1], [-] [1, 0]and [-] [1, 1] (i.e. whether or not any of the three types of accessobjects is mounted). In this case, a predetermined bit becomes effectivefor determining whether the remaining only one type of access objectleft undetermined is mounted or no access object is mounted at all. Inthis discrimination of four types of the access objects, the type of theaccess object left undetermined is set to the predetermined type of anaccess object.

Further, the same can be applied to the above case of two (=2¹) types ofaccess objects and the state of no mounted access object being detected.In this case, a pattern [0] [0] is assigned (caused to correspond) tothe state of no mounted access object, and patterns [1] [0], [-] [1] tothe two types, and hence it is determined whether or not a mountedaccess object belongs to one of the two types, [-] [1] (i.e. whether ornot the one type is mounted). A predetermined one bit is effective fordetermining whether the remaining only one type of an access object leftundetermined is mounted or no access object is mounted at all. In thisdiscrimination of two types of access objects, the type of the accessobject left undetermined is set to be predetermined type of an accessobject.

Furthermore, two bits for discrimination of four types of access objectsand one bit for discrimination of two types of access objects aredetected by a mechanical contact-type detecting device comprised e.g. oflimit switches, similarly to the conventional apparatus, while thepredetermined one bit for determination as to whether or not any accessobject is mounted, is detected by a non-contact-type detecting device.

The above-mentioned points are summarized as follows. According to thetype-detecting method used by the tape printing apparatus 1, themounting of any of (m−1) types of access objects except for apredetermined type out of m (2^(k)≧m>2^(k)−1, wherein k represents anatural number) types of access objects, and at the same time the typeof the mounted access object, are detected by a contact-type detectingdevice, while whether or not any access object is mounted is detected bya non-contact-type detecting device. If it is not detected that any ofthe (m−1) types of access objects is mounted, when it is detected by thenon-contact-type detecting device that an access object is mounted, itis determined that the predetermined type of access objects is mounted.

In other words, when the tape printing apparatus 1 is regarded as anelectronic apparatus which has one of m (a plurality of) types of accessobjects mounted therein and accesses the mounted access object in amanner dependent on the type thereof, the type-detecting method ofdetecting the type of an access object employed by the tape printingapparatus 1 according to the present embodiment defines a predeterminedone of the m (plurality of) types of access objects, and detects thetype of a mounted one of the access objects while minimizing mountingerrors in mounting the predetermined type of access object by carryingout non-contact detection of this predetermined type.

Further, by providing a contact-type detecting device for detecting themounting of any of the (m−1) types of access objects and discriminatingthe type of the mounted access object, it is possible to detect themounting of the m types of access objects and discriminate the type ofthe mounted access object, which enables the contact-type detectingdevice to be designed compact in size.

In other words, to detect the mounting of any of the m (=2^(k)) types ofaccess objects and discriminate the type of the mounted access objects,it is conventionally required to provide a contact type detecting devicewhich is capable of detecting (k+1)-bit patterns to make (m+1)(=2^(k)+1) kinds of determination as the sum of one kind ofdetermination of the state of no mounted access object and m kinds ofdetermination for determining the types of m types of access objects.However, according to the type-detecting method applied to the tapeprinting apparatus 1, to make the above-mentioned m (=2^(k)) kinds ofdetermination, it is only required that a contact-type detecting devicewhich is capable of detecting k-bit patterns is provided. This enablesthe contact-type detecting device to be designed compact in size. On theother hand, the non-contact-type detecting device is only required to becapable of detecting whether or not an access object is mounted at allas the minimum requirement, whereby it is possible to employ anon-contact-type detecting device having a simple configuration.

This point will be further described in the following. To adopt thetype-detecting method of this kind, each access object mounted in anelectronic apparatus employing the method is formed with maximum krecesses, holes or equivalent cut-away portions corresponding to k bitsfor forming predetermined k-bit patterns to be detected by acontact-type detecting device. Recesses, holes or equivalent cut-awayportions of an access object of a predetermined type are shaped suchthat the same predetermined pattern as one detected when no accessobject is mounted is detected by the contact-type detecting device.

The type-detecting method and device are suitable for use with e.g. anapparatus whose access object is easily formed with the recesses, holesor equivalent cut-away portions of a stamp body or the like, that is,for use with an electronic apparatus, such as a stamp making apparatusor the like.

Further, a pattern detected by the contact-type detecting device when anaccess object of the predetermined type is mounted and a patterndetected by the same when no access object is mounted are identical.Therefore, the access object of the predetermined kind is formed withrecesses, holes or equivalent cut-away portions corresponding to thepattern detected when no access object is mounted, that is, the patterndetected when the contact-type detecting device makes no contact withany object. This makes it possible to minimize mounting errors, such asan error that the access object is lifted up from the compartment due tocontact for detection.

Further, in the above case, it is preferred that the above predeterminedpattern has a k-bit pattern comprised of all 0's. That is, if thepredetermined pattern has a k-bit pattern comprised of all 0's, it ismost suitable for an image representative of the state of no mountedaccess object, which is most frequently detected and at the same timeprovides the easiest pattern to process in mathematical operations,whereby it is possible to enhance efficiency of detection processingcarried out by the apparatus.

Furthermore, in the above cases, the contact-type detecting device, forinstance, has k mechanical switches activated by abutment againstportions where maximum k recesses, holes, or equivalent cut-awayportions are formed or left unformed. A state where a switch isprevented from abutting the above portions by forming a correspondingrecess, hole or equivalent cut-away portion is caused to correspond to[0] of a corresponding bit of the pattern, whereas a state where theswitch abuts a corresponding portion is caused to correspond to [1].

In this case, the contact-type detecting device implemented by the kswitches can detect k bit patterns to make a total of m kinds ofdetermination as the sum of one kind of determination of the state of nomounted access object and (m−1) kinds of determination of the (m−1)types of access objects, so that it is possible to detect the mountingof any of the (m−1) types of access objects and discriminate the typethereof. Further, in this case, the recesses, holes, or equivalentcut-away portions of the predetermined type of access object are formedinto shapes which prevent all the k switches from abutting the accessobject, that is, which prevent all the switches from being brought intocontact with the access object, whereby it is possible to use the samepattern as used in the case of no access object being mounted, fordetecting the predetermined type of access object.

On the other hand, as described above, in the tape printing apparatus asthe electronic apparatus, a tape (access object) as a print material isgenerally held in a tape cartridge corresponding to the type of the tapeand mounted in the compartment of the tape printing apparatus 1 in thestate held in the tape cartridge.

Therefore, to apply the above type-detecting method of detecting thetype of an access object to the electronic apparatus of this kind, thatis, the electronic apparatus, each access object is mounted in acompartment in the state held in an access object-holding cartridgecorresponding to the access object. The cartridge is formed with maximumk recesses, holes or equivalent cut-away portions corresponding to kbits of predetermined patterns for detection by a contact-type detectingdevice. The recesses, holes or equivalent cut-away portions of thecartridge holding an access object of a predetermined type are formedsuch that when the same predetermined pattern as one detected when noaccess object mounted is detected by the contact-type detecting device.

The type-detecting method and device of this particular kind is suitablefor use with an apparatus whose access object, such as a tape or thelike, is difficult to be formed with recesses, holes or equivalentcut-away portions, that is, for use with a stamp making apparatus orlike electronic apparatuses.

In the tape printing apparatus 1, actually, as described above, thereare provided several kinds of tape cartridges 5 each holding acorresponding one of the above-mentioned tapes T, that is, tapes Tranging from a side label(LS)-forming tape T having a width ofapproximately four mm to a case label(LMC)-forming tape having a widthof approximately 52 mm, as well as tapes T without half-die-cut labelsformed therein, respectively. For convenience of description and claritythereof, it is assumed that there are provided only two kinds of tapes(a main label-forming tape T and a side label-forming tape T) as shownin FIG. 4A and 4B, and hence, this case corresponds to the above casewhere the two (=2¹) types of access objects and the state of no mountedaccess object are detected.

That is, since the pattern [0] [0] is assigned to the state of nomounted access object, and the patterns [1] [0], [-] [1] to the twotypes of access objects, it is determined whether or not the mountedaccess object belong to one of the two types, i.e. [-] [1] (whether ornot the one type is mounted). In this case, a predetermined one bitbecomes effective for determining whether only the one type of accessobject left undetermined is mounted or no access object is mounted atall. In discrimination of the two types of access objects, the type ofthe access object left undetermined is set to a predetermined type of anaccess object.

More specifically, the side label-forming tape T for use in forming theside label LS is set to the predetermined one type. This is because theside label-forming tape T has a width smaller than that of the mainlabel-forming tape T (see FIGS. 4A and 4B) for forming the main labelLM, so that a holding error is liable to occur when it is held in thetape cartridge 5, and because the tape cartridge 5 is so thin that amounting error in mounting the same in the compartment 6 liable to occurand moreover, accuracy in printing position is required due to the smallprinting area (area of a half-die-cut label) of the tape.

In the tape printing apparatus 1, as described above with reference toFIG. 1 and the like or as shown in FIGS. 49A and 49B, the compartment 6includes a tape-discriminating sensor 141 comprised e.g. of amicro-switch or limit switch. Further, the tape position sensor 143comprised of a photo interrupter or the like, for detecting the positionof the tape T through optical sensing (in this embodiment, by usingreflected light) is arranged in the vicinity of the tape exit 22.

Referring to FIGS. 48A and 48B, as viewed from below or the bottom sideof the type cartridge 5 (as viewed from below or the bottom side suchthat the tape-sending slit 56 is positioned on the right-hand side), theFIG. 48A tape cartridge 5 holding the main label-forming tape T isshaped such that when mounted in the compartment 6, the same abuts onthe mechanical switch (the above micro-switch, limit switch or the like)of the tape-discriminating sensor 141. On the other hand, the FIG. 48Btape cartridge 5 holding the side label-forming tape T is formed with arecess 71 for avoiding contact with the mechanical switch such that thetape cartridge is kept from contact with the tape-discriminating sensor141.

As a result, when the FIG. 48A tape cartridge 5 holding the mainlabel-forming tape T is mounted in the compartment 6, thetape-discriminating sensor 141 detects the mounting of the FIG. 48A tapecartridge 5 in the compartment 6, whereas when the FIG. 48B tapecartridge 5 holding the side label-forming tape T is mounted, thetape-discriminating sensor 141 detects the same state as that of thetape cartridge being not mounted.

Let it be assumed that, a flag bit (hereinafter referred to as “the sidelabel detection flag”) indicative of a result of optical (non-contact)sensing carried out by the tape position sensor 143 (non-contact-typedetecting device), and a flag bit (hereinafter referred to as “the mainlabel detection flag”) indicative of a result of detection carried outby the tape-discriminating sensor 141 (contact-type detecting device)using the mechanical (contact-type) limit switch or the like arerepresented in side-by-side notation of [side label detection flag][main label detection flag]. Then, as described above, the pattern [0][0] is assigned to the state of no mounted access object, the pattern[1] [0] is assigned to one (side label-forming tape T) of the two typesof tape T, and the pattern [-] [1] to the other (main label-forming tapeT) of the two types of tape T.

Therefore, when the tape cartridge 5 holding one (main label-formingtape T) of the two types of tape T, that is, one holding the tape T foruse in forming the main label LM is mounted in the compartment 6, themounting of the tape cartridge is detected, so that the type of tape Tis determined based on only a result of detection carried out by thetape-discriminating sensor 141 (contact-type detecting device). If it isnot determined, that is, if the result of the detection is the same asthat of the state of the tape cartridge being not mounted, it isdetermined based on a result of detection carried out by the tapeposition sensor 143 (non-contact-type detecting device) whether there isno tape cartridge mounted or the tape cartridge 5 holding the tape T foruse in forming the side label LS is mounted.

As described above with reference to FIG. 26, in the print data-formingprocess (S481), first, it is determined at step S4811 whether or not thedisc label or the case label is selected. Here, for instance, when thepower of the tape printing apparatus 1 is turned on in advance byoperating the power key 31, or when the opening or closing of the lid 21is detected by the lid opening/closing sensor 142 (i.e. when there is apossibility of replacing the tape cartridge 5), it is detected by thetape-discriminating sensor 141 whether or not the tape cartridge 5 forholding a main label-forming tape T is mounted. If the tape cartridge 5is mounted, the main label detection flag is ON (=1) (that is, the typeof tape T is already determined).

Therefore, when it is determined next at step S4812 whether or not thetape cartridge 5 for holding a main label-forming tape T is mounted, itis only required to check whether the main label detection flag is ON orOFF (1 or 0).

Further, thereafter, when the print image-forming process (S4813) isterminated, followed by terminating the print data-forming process atstep S481, next, the label-positioning process (S482) is carried out. Inthis label-positioning process (S482), first, the vertical printingposition adjustment process (S4821) is carried out according to thesettings of the printing position, described above with reference toFIG. 46, etc. and then, the side label presence/absence detection &horizontal printing position adjustment (S4822) is started.

In the side label presence/absence detection & horizontal printingposition adjustment (S4822), as shown in FIG. 47, first, a side labelpresence/absence detection process (S48221) is carried out andthereafter, a horizontal printing position adjustment process (S48222)is executed.

In the side label presence/absence detection process (S48221), first, itis determined at step S482211 whether or not the main label cartridge ismounted, that is, whether or not the main label detection flag is ON. Ifthe main label detection flag is ON (Yes to S482211), the side labelpresence/absence detection process (S48221) is terminated in this state,and the flow proceeds to the horizontal printing position adjustmentprocess (S48222).

On the other hand, when the main label detection flag is OFF (No toS482211), next, it is determined at step S482212 whether or not (thetape cartridge for holding) a side label-forming tape T is alreadydetected, that is, whether or not the side label detection flag is ON.If the side label detection flag is ON (Yes to S482212), similarly, theside label presence/absence detection process (S48221) is terminated inthis state, and the flow proceeds to the horizontal printing positionadjustment process (S48222).

Further, if the side label detection flag is OFF (No to S482212), next,it is detected and determined at step S482213 whether or not the tape Tis mounted, that is, it is detected by the tape position sensor 143(optical sensor: by emitting light to a portion of the tape exit 22,where the tape T should exist and receiving reflected light from thetape T, by using the photo interrupter or the like) and determined basedon a result of the detection whether or not the tape T exists.

If it is detected that the tape T exists (Yes to S482213), it isdetermined that the tape cartridge 5 holding a side label-forming tape Tis mounted. Then, after the side label detection flag is set or turnedON at step S482216, the side label presence/absence detection process(S48221) is terminated, and the flow proceeds to the horizontal printingposition adjustment process (S48222).

On the other hand, if the existence or presence of the tape T is notdetected (No to S482213), it is detected, while feeding the tape Tmaximum 13 mm at step S482214, by the tape position sensor 143 whetheror not the tape T exists. If it is detected in the course of the feedingof the tape T that the tape T is mounted or exists (Yes to S482215), itis determined that the tape cartridge 5 holding a side label-formingtape T is mounted, and after setting the side label detection flag atstep S482216, the side label presence/absence detection process (S48221)is terminated, and the flow proceeds to the horizontal printing positionadjustment process (S48222).

The tape T is fed maximum 13 mm, since 13 mm corresponds to a distanceover which the tape T is fed from the tape-sending slit 56 to a positionwhere the tape T can be detected by the tape position sensor 143, thatis, a distance over which the tape T is required to be sent from thetape-sending slit 56 to the tape exit 22, when the tape T is mounted inthe compartment 6 with only a small portion of the tip thereof isoutward of the tape-sending slit 56 (see FIGS. 1, 48A, 48B, 49A and49B).

Therefore, although the tape is fed maximum 13 mm, if the existence ofthe tape T cannot yet be detected (No to S482215), it is determined thatthe tape cartridge 5 is not loaded, and a no-tape cartridge detectionflag is set or turned ON at step S482217. In the following horizontalprinting position adjustment process (S48222), an error flag is simplyset at step S482224, followed by terminating the process at step S48223.

On the other hand, when the flow proceeds to the horizontal printingposition adjustment process (S48222) in the state of the main labeldetection flag or the side label detection flag being set, first,detection of the reference hole TH, described above with reference toFIGS. 4A, 4B and the like, for detecting the position of the tape T iscarried out by using the tape position sensor 143, that is, the tape Tis fed until the reference hole TH is detected by the tape positionsensor 143 at step S482221.

After the reference hole TH is detected (S482221), it is determined atstep S482222 whether or not the reference hole TH has a predeterminedlength. If the reference hole TH do not have the predetermined length(No to S482222), the error flag is set at step S482224, followed byterminating the process at step S48223.

On the other hand, when the reference hole TH has the predeterminedlength (Yes to S482222), next, the pre-print tape feed is carried out atstep S482223. In this process, if the option “MAIN H” (G76) or theoption “SIDE H” (G78) has been selected to set the same, the pre-printtape feed (S482223) is carried out according to the set value, whereaswhen neither of the options is set, the pre-print tape feed (S482223) iscarried out to feed the tape T to the reference position, followed byterminating the process (S48223). This pre-print tape feed (S482223) andthe post-print tape feed (S503) in the during-printing display process(S50), described hereinabove with reference to FIG. 26, which isexecuted after the present process is terminated, are carried out, forhorizontal adjustment of the printing position.

As described above with reference to FIG. 26, after terminating thelabel-positioning process at step S482, it is determined at step S483whether or not results of the detections carried out by the process arenormal. Here, when the error flag is set at step S482224 in FIG. 47 toindicate some error (No to S483), that is, when no cartridge is mountedor when the detected position of the reference hole TH is not normal (Noto S483), similarly to the above case in which the tape cartridge 5mounted is different from the one selected (No to S4812), the labelreplacement display process (S49) for displaying an error message or thelike to prompt the user to replace the label is carried out, followed byreturning to the screen in the basic entry mode at step S51.

On the other hand, as described hereinbefore with reference to FIG. 25and the like, when the in-preparation display process (S48) is normallyterminated, next, the during-printing display process (S50) is executed,and then the printing process is terminated, followed by returning tothe screen in the basic entry mode at step S51.

Although in the above example, in order to detect the mounting of (thetape cartridge 5 holding ) a tape T (for use in forming a main label LM)of one (=m−1) of two types (m=2=2¹, i.e. k=1) of tapes T as an accessobject by using the tape-discriminating sensor 141, the presence orabsence of one (=k) recess (k=1-bit pattern) is detected, this is notlimitative, but when there are provided a lot of types of tapes T (andcorresponding tape cartridges 5), it is also possible to form more andmaximum k recesses according to the types of tape T, to thereby detect ak-bit of pattern.

In the above case, it is possible to detect the mounting of any of tapesT of maximum 2^(k) types including a predetermined type of (sidelabel-forming) tape T discriminated from the state of no tape T (nocartridge) being mounted by using the tape position sensor 143, and thetype of the mounted type. Further, the tape cartridge 5 may be formedwith any suitably shaped portions, such as holes, cut-away portions, orconcave portions, which are equivalent to recesses.

Further, also in a tape printing apparatus for mounting (or insertingtherein) tapes without any cartridges containing the same, each tape canbe formed with holes for detection which have a different patternaccording to the type of the tape. In such a variation as well, it ispossible to set a tape requiring the highest printing accuracy to a tapeof a predetermined type, thereby minimizing mounting errors in mountingthe tape of the predetermined type.

As described above, in the type-detecting method of detecting the typeof an access object employed in the tape printing apparatus 1, eachaccess object (tape T) is mounted in the compartment 6 in the state ofthe access object (tape T) being held in an access object-holdingcartridge (tape cartridge 5) corresponding to the same. The accessobject -holding cartridge is formed with maximum k recesses, holes orequivalent cut-away portions corresponding to predetermined k-bitpatterns to be detected by a detecting device of a contact type (thetape-discriminating sensor 141).

In this embodiment, similarly to the variation in which the accessobject itself is formed with recesses, holes or equivalent cut-awayportions corresponding to the k-bit patterns for detection of the typeof the access object, the recesses, holes or equivalent cut-awayportions of an access object-holding cartridge holding an access objectof a predetermined type are formed such that the same predeterminedpattern as one detected when no access object is mounted is detected bythe contact-type detecting device.

Therefore, the access object of the predetermined type is formed withrecesses, holes or equivalent cut-away portions corresponding to thepattern detected when no access object is mounted, that is, thepredetermined pattern detected when no access object is mounted, andhence the contact-type detecting device is kept from contact, whichmakes it possible to minimize mounting errors, such as an error that theaccess object is lifted up from the compartment due to contact fordetection.

Further, in the type-detecting method of detecting the type of an accessobject applied to the tape printing apparatus 1, when an access object(tape T) is mounted in the apparatus in the state of the same being heldin a corresponding access object-holding cartridge (tape cartridge), theaccess object (tape T) is sent out from the access object-holdingcartridge (i.e. from the tape-sending slit 56 of the tape cartridge 5)and then, it is detected (by the tape position sensor 143) whether ornot the access object (tape T) exists at a position (near the tape exit22) where the access object sent out should exist.

That is, since the access object sent out is detected, it is possible todetermine the presence or absence of the access object without providingan access object-holding cartridge with a particular configuration onlyfor detection. Further, an electronic apparatus, which accesses anaccess object mounted therein in a state received in a cartridge,generally has a device for sending out the access object (this holdstrue with the tape printing apparatus 1), and hence the device can beutilized for sending the access object for detection.

Further, in the above example, as described above, the predeterminedpattern has a k-bit pattern formed of all 0's, so that the pattern isthe most suitable for an image representative of the state of no mountedaccess object, which is most frequently detected, and at the same timeprovides the easiest pattern to process in mathematical operation,whereby it is possible to enhance the efficiency of the detectionprocessing carried out by the apparatus.

Furthermore, in the above example, as described above, the contact-typedetecting device (tape discriminating sensor 141) has k (k=1 in theabove example) mechanical switches activated in dependence on results ofthe switches being brought into contact with portions formed (or notformed) with maximum k recesses, holes, or equivalent cut-away portions.A state where each switch is not in contact with a corresponding one ofthe above portions by the presence of a corresponding recess, hole orequivalent cut-away portion is caused to correspond to [0] of a bit ofthe pattern, whereas a state where the switch is in contact with thecorresponding portion is caused to correspond to [1].

In this case, the contact-type detecting device using the k switches candetect k bits of patterns for making a total of m kinds of determinationas the sum of one kind of determination of the state of no mountedaccess object and (m−1) kinds of determination for determining the typesof the access objects of (m−1) types, whereby it is possible to detectthe mounting of the (m−1) types of access objects and discriminate thetypes thereof. Further, in this case, the recesses, holes, or equivalentcut-away portions of the predetermined type of access object are formedinto shapes which prevent all the k switches from abutting the accessobject, that is, which prevent all the switches from being brought intocontact with the access object. This makes it possible to use the samepattern as used in the case of no access object being mounted fordetecting the predetermined type of access object.

Particularly in the present embodiment, the type-detecting method anddevice are applied to the tape printing apparatus 1. When a tape havingthe smallest width is mounted in a printing apparatus of a conventionaltape, if a small-sized (thin) tape cartridge is used for holding thetape, and the presence or absence of the tape as well as the typethereof are to be detected by a contact-type detecting device, the tapecartridge is so light that it can be lifted up from a compartment or sosmall that it cannot properly face the detecting device, which is liableto cause an increased frequency of mounting errors. On the other hand,if a large-sized tape cartridge is used, holding errors in holding thetape in the tape cartridge and feeding errors in feeding the tape arelikely to be increased in frequency. Further, when a half-die-cut labeldefined by half die cutting is formed in a tape to print a print imagethereon, if the formed half-die-cut label is small in size, it isrequired to set a printing position with higher accuracy than when theprint image is printed on a large-sized half-die-cut label.

To overcome these problems, according to the tape printing apparatus 1,a tape of a type which is desired to be printed with minimizedpossibility of errors related to mounting operation of the tape, such asmounting errors, holding errors, printing errors and the like, is set toa predetermined type of tape, and detected by a different method fromthat of detecting other types of tapes which are detected by acontact-type detecting device. That is, the predetermined type of tapeis detected by a non-contact-type detecting device. Further, also in atape printing apparatus for use in combination with a tape mountedwithout any cartridge containing the tape, the tape can be formed withholes having a different pattern according to the type of the tape. Insuch a variation as well, it is possible to set a tape requiring thehighest printing accuracy to a tape of a predetermined type, therebyminimizing mounting errors in mounting the tape of the predeterminedtype.

Further, in the tape printing apparatus 1, a tape position detectingdevice (tape position sensor 143), which detects the position of a tapeT by using a non-contact type detecting device during the tape feedcontrol, can be used for detecting the presence or absence of the tape Tas an access object. It should be noted that the tape position detectingdevice of the above-mentioned kind is provided not only in the tapeprinting apparatus 1 but also in tape printing apparatuses of thegeneral type, so that the same can be realized without adding a newparticular detecting device to the apparatuses.

Further, in the tape printing apparatus 1, the tape T is formed withreference holes TH with reference to which the position of the tape T isdetected at predetermined space intervals. Since the non-contact-typedetecting device (tape position sensor 143) is provided for detectingthe reference holes TH, and hence after detecting whether or not thetape T is mounted, if the presence of the tape T is detected, thereference hole TH can be detected to thereby detect the position of thetape T. Further, the non-contact-type detecting device is provided withan optical sensor which detects by optical means whether or not anaccess object is mounted, so that it is possible to carry outnon-contact detection without any problems.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the tape printingapparatus 1 as an electronic apparatus 1 forms labels to be affixed to adisc cartridge (MD cartridge 91) holding a disc (MD 92). A tape T as anaccess object of a predetermined type (for use in forming side labelsLS) is formed with side labels as half-die-cut labels each for beingaffixed to a side surface of the disc cartridge.

Generally, the disc cartridge 5 has a side surface having a small width,and hence the side label LS is necessarily required to be small in size.To print a print image formed e.g. of a desired character string in theprinting area of the side label LS, it is required to minimize errors ofvarious kinds. In the type-detecting method used in the tape printingapparatus 1 for detecting the type of an access object, out of thevarious tapes T as access objects, the tape T formed with side labels LSby half die cutting is set to the predetermined type of tape T, therebyminimizing errors related to the mounting operation of the tape T, whichmakes it possible to minimize printing errors (as the sum of severalkinds of errors) in printing the side labels LS.

Next, display (notification, guide) -related methods of the tapeprinting apparatus 1 will be described hereinafter. First of all, amethod of notifying the user of processing formats, used in the tapeprinting apparatus 1 regarded as a data processing device (particularly,character processing device), will be described.

For instance, a data processing device for processing data of characters(including letters, symbols, simple figures, etc.), that is, a characterprocessing device is taken as an example. In a character processingdevice having a large-sized display screen, such as a word processor orthe like, it is possible to select and set one of the processing formatsfor each character string (data group) having one or more characters(data items), and check on the display screen which processing format isset to a character string the user is paying attention to.

More specifically, let it be assumed that there are provided a pluralityof kinds of processing formats which can be set to a character stringthe user is paying attention to, such as enlargement/reduction(extension, shortening, enlargement, reduction, and so forth), characterdecoration (underline, delete line, enclosed character, shadedcharacter, half tone dot meshing, highlight, italic, outline (hollow),shading, reversal, rotation, etc.), edit configurations (framedecoration, automatic new line start, automatic page break insertion,automatic paragraph break insertion, line number display, informationnumber display, etc.), and a type face font settings. Even if the userselects a plurality of processing formats from the above formats to setthe same to a character string he (she) is paying attention to, the usercan directly check the processed character string owing to thelarge-sized display screen.

On the other hand, in a relatively small-sized character processingdevice, such as a tape printing apparatus, a stamp making apparatus orthe like, which is a data processing apparatus of the above-mentionedkind but has a small-sized display screen, it is difficult to directlyview a processing format set to each character or each character stringon the display screen thereof. Therefore, the data processing apparatus(character processing apparatus) of this kind without a large-sizeddisplay screen is provided e.g. with indicators corresponding torespective processing formats, and when the user designates a characterto which he pays attention by operating the cursor, an indicatorcorresponding to a processing format set to the character is lighted,thereby enabling the user to directly check a processing format set toeach character or each character string.

In the above data processing apparatus without a large-sized displayscreen, however, there is a case where the user desires tosimultaneously view all the processing formats set to characters orcharacter strings at a glance. On the other hand, there is also provideda data processing apparatus which is capable of classifying a pluralityof data groups to be processed into a plurality of to-be-processedgroups, and collectively setting a desired processing format to eachdata group included in each to-be-processed group on a group-by-groupbasis.

The tape printing apparatus 1 corresponds to the data processingapparatus which is capable of classifying a plurality of data groups tobe processed into a plurality of to-be-processed groups, andcollectively setting a desired processing format to each data groupincluded in each to-be-processed group on a group-by-group basis. Tothis end, the tape printing apparatus 1 is configured such thatprocessing formats set on a group-by-group basis can be viewed at aglance.

First, as described hereinbefore with reference to FIG. 9, the display 4has the indicator display block 4 i which is capable of lightingeighteen indicators, and the character display block 4 c formed of a dotmatrix of 72 (width)×16 (length) dots in the display screen 41 comprisedof LCD or the like.

The indicator display block 4 i indicated printing modes for printingcharacter data of titles and music titles as well as printing states ofthe tape printing apparatus 1, by the ON-OFF state of each indicator.The indicator display block 4 i has the eight upper indicators 4 i 00 to4 i 07 shown in FIG. 10 for indicating information concerning a title(corresponding to a disc title), and the eight lower indicators 4 i 10to 4 i 17 for indicating information concerning music titles. That is,the upper horizontal sequence of indicators indicates processing formatsrelated to a title (disc title), while the lower horizontal sequence ofindicators indicates processing formats related to music titles.

On the other hand, for instance, in the example described above withreference to FIG. 29, description is made that the “automatic newline-starting format” is set in the state of a music title beingdisplayed in the basic entry mode (G61), whereby it is possible to setthe “NL-ON” (automatic new line start-ON format) and the “NL-OFF”(automatic new line start-OFF format) for a music title. In thisembodiment, in the state of the “NL-ON” for a music title being set inthe basic entry mode (G61), out of the indicators 4 i 10 to 4 i 17 in ahorizontal row indicated by “MUSIC” in FIG. 10, i.e. the lower line ofindicators, the indicator 4 i 11 at an intersection of this horizontalrow and a column under “NL-START” (automatic new line start) is lighted,whereby it is indicated that the format “MUSIC NL-START” is set orturned ON, whereas when the option “NL-OFF” for a music title is set(G64), the indicator 4 i 11 is turned off.

Further, it is also described that if the same operation as describedabove is carried out in the state of a title being displayed in thebasic entry mode, it is possible to set the “NL-ON” (automatic new linestart-ON format) or the “NL-OFF” (automatic new line start-OFF format)for the title. That is, according to the tape printing apparatus 1, anautomatic new line-starting format (processing format) for music titlesand an automatic new line-starting format (processing format) for atitle (disc title) can be set separately from each other.

Further, not only the automatic new line-starting formats but alsoprocessing formats juxtaposed for display on the FIG. 10 indicatordisplay block 4 i, that is, processing formats FRAME, NL-START, SHORTEN,EXTEND, OUTLINE, ITALIC, MINCHO, and GOTHIC can be separately set for atitle and music titles. Although the format “NL-START”, described abovewith reference to FIG. 29, is set by operating the format key 34FS outof the function keys for changing the basic entry mode to thefunction-selecting/setting mode shown in FIG. 19, the format “FRAME” canbe set by operating the frame key 34CS and thereafter designating aframe number at a menu screen immediately under the processing format“FRAME”, while the other processing formats of the character decorationcan be set by operating the decoration key 34 and then designating eachformat at a menu screen under the character decoration.

The details of the settings of the processing formats are stored in aprocessing format (internal configuration) register of the registergroup 241 in the RAM 240 in formats shown in FIGS. 50 and 51C.

More specifically, as shown in the figures, bit numbers b31 to b30record cartridge information shown in FIG. 51A. Bit numbers b29 to b28for automatic new line-starting information store automatic newline-starting information of a title line and that of a music title lineshown in FIG. 51B, respectively. Bit numbers b27 to b26 storesinformation of the print sheet number shown in FIG. 51C. Bit numbers b23to b16 for frame information represents values from 0 to 255, whereinnumeral 0 designates the state of a main label being decorated with noframe, and values 1 to 255 designate frame numbers.

Bit numbers b12 to b08 and bit numbers b04 to b00 designate characterdecoration information (“TYPEFACE”, “EXTEND”, “REDUCE”, “OUTLINE” and“ITALIC”) of the title line and the music title line, respectively,wherein in the “TYPEFACE”, value 0 designates Mincho and value 1 Gothic,in the Japanese language-adapted type apparatus of the presentembodiment, and in the other character decoration information items,value 1 represents that each information is designated.

As described above, the tape printing apparatus 1 corresponds to a dataprocessing apparatus which is capable of classifying a plurality of datagroups (character strings) to be processed into a plurality ofto-be-processed groups (title-related and music title-related groups),and collectively setting a desired processing format to each data groupincluded in each to-be-processed group on a group-by-group basis.

In a processing format-notifying method used by the tape printingapparatus 1, according to the present embodiment, a plurality ofindicators (indicator display block 4 j) arranged in the form of amatrix formed by a plurality of rows upper and lower rows in theindicator display block 4 i shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 indicative ofrespective to-be-process groups (title-related and music title-relatedcharacter strings) and a plurality of columns indicative of respectiveplurality of processing formats (FRAME, NL-START, etc.) or setting. Eachindicator (e.g. indicator 4 i 11) located at an intersection of a row(e.g. lower one) corresponding to a desired one of the to-be-processedgroups (e.g. music title-related character strings) and a column (e.g.second vertical column from the left-hand end) corresponding to adesired one of the processing formats (e.g. automatic new line-startingformat) indicates whether or not the desired one of the processingformats is set to the desired one of the to-be-processed groups (whetheror not the “NL-ON” for a music title is set).

As a result, from the plurality of indicators (indicator display block 4i) arranged in the form of a matrix, the user can ascertain eachprocessing format set to each to-be-processed group at a glance.

Although in the above example, “OUTLINE (hollow)”, “ITALIC” and the likeare indicated by way of examples of character decoration, this is notlimitative, but it is possible to adopt other character decoration formsof general types, such as underline, delete line, enclosed character,shading, highlight, reversal, and rotation. If these characterdecoration forms are included in the processing formats indicated by theindicators, the user can view a plurality of indicators arranged in theform of matrix, thereby checking a character decoration configurationset to each to-be-processed group at a glance.

Further, although in the above example, “EXTEND (extension)”, “SHORTEN(shortening)” and the like are indicated by way of examples ofenlargement/reduction of characters, this is not limitative, but it isalso possible to include normal expansion or reduction. If thesecharacter enlargement/reduction forms are included in the processingformats indicated by the indicators, the user can view a plurality ofindicators arranged in the form of matrix, thereby checking a characterenlargement/reduction configuration set to each to-be-processed group ata glance.

Furthermore, although in the above example, “FRAME (frame decoration)”,and “NL-START (automatic new line start)” are indicated by way ofexamples of character edit configuration, this is not limitative, but itis also possible to adopt other edit capabilities of general types forconfiguration or setting, such as automatic page break insertion,automatic paragraph break insertion, line number display, informationnumber display, and the like. If these edit function-setting forms areincluded in the processing formats notified by the indicators, the usercan view a plurality of indicators arranged in the form of matrix,thereby checking an edit function configuration set to eachto-be-processed group at a glance.

Still further, although in the above example, Mincho and Gothic for theJapanese language are indicated by way of examples of the typefacetherefor, this is not limitative, by including other typeface processingformats in the processing formats notified by the indicators, the usercan view such a plurality of indicators arranged in the form of matrix,thereby checking an edit function configuration set to eachto-be-processed group at a glance.

Next, a character information display method as one of the display(notification, guide) -related methods of the tape printing apparatus 1will be described.

In general, an editing device for editing character information, aprinter for printing the edited character information, and the like, areprovided with a character information display device having a displayscreen for entering and editing character information and checking theresulting character information. The character information is input andedited in text code data (character code) corresponding to the characterinformation, which is converted to data of a display image based on apredetermined font. Then, the display image is displayed on the displayscreen. As devices of this kind, there are a personal computer havingword processing software installed therein, and a device dedicatedlyprovided for word processing (so-called word processor).

A personal computer can have software (so-called editor) exclusivelyprovided for editing text code data including program codes and thelike. The editor has a capability of displaying the text code data afteradding line numbers thereto for purposes of convenience of edit.Further, there are sometimes provided editors or word processors whichhave a capability of adding a number (character string number) to asequence of characters when the user consciously adds (inputs) adelimiter (code) (by carrying out arbitrary new line start, forinstance), regardless of whether character strings are displayed in aline or a plurality of lines (due to automatic new line start), andupdating the character string numbers whenever the user enters anotherdelimiter (code).

In the above cases, information numbers, such as line numbers orcharacter string numbers, each added to a line or a sequence ofcharacters (a piece of character information) are usually displayed onan edit screen as numerals “1”, “2”, . . . entered or arranged forwardof each character information, so that the user can input and editcharacter information, while viewing the information numbers.

However, in a relatively small-sized character processing apparatus,such as a tape printing apparatus, a stamp making apparatus, and thelike, although it is a data processing device of the same kind as theabove editor and word processor, there is provided a small-sized displayscreen, which prevents sufficient space from being provided between aninformation number and character information corresponding thereto,resulting in difficulty of viewing displayed information. Thisinconvenience becomes more noticeable, particularly when characterinformation contains numerals. For instance, in a case where characterinformation of information number “1” is a character string “1A2B3C . .. ”, the information is displayed as “11A2B3C . . . ”, which makes itdifficult to discriminate between the information number and thecharacter information.

However, if sufficient space intervals are forcibly provided, or if adelimiter, such as a period “.”, is added to display the informatione.g. as “1.”, the information is not made much easier to view orrecognize, and moreover, an area for arranging character information isreduced (display efficiency is degraded), thereby causing inconveniencein edit operations and the like. This inconvenience becomes morenoticeable, particularly when the number of digits is increased. Forinstance, in the case of a 2-digit information number being used, acharacter information-arranging area is reduced in space for onecharacter in comparison with the case of a 1-digit information numberbeing used.

To cope with the above inconvenience of degraded display efficiency, ifa full-size 2-digit information number “10.” is converted to a half-size2-digit information number “10.” to display the information number as“10. 1A2B3C . . . ”, instead of “10. 1A2B3C . . . ”, the information isnot made much easier to view. Further, if character information can bedisplayed in half size, for instance, if a character string “10A2B3C . .. ” is displayed in a manner arranged immediately after the informationnumber “10.”, the information is displayed as “10. 10A2B3C . . . ”.Therefore, conversion of a full-size information number to a half-sizeone does not contribute to solution of the above problem of difficultyin discriminating the information number from the character information.

To solve the above problem, the tape printing apparatus 1 employs thecharacter information display method which enables the user to easilydiscriminate between an information number and corresponding characterinformation displayed in a small-sized display screen, while enhancingdisplay efficiency. In the following, this method will be described indetail.

First of all, character code data (text data) items to be processed inthe tape printing apparatus 1 are each is constructed according to adata format shown in FIG. 52.

More specifically, as shown in the figure, when a line of a characterstring or a sequence of a plurality of lines of character strings is setas one character information item, the one character information itembasically has line head data defining an information number (musicnumber, in this example) and character code data of each characterfollowing the line head data and forming a line of or a sequence of aplurality of character strings.

One character (code) is formed of two bytes. The line head data andend-of-data-indicating data (hereinafter referred to as “EOD”) are alsoeach comprised of two bytes, and processed as one character. An area formaximum 1800 characters is allocated to an area for arranging thecharacter code data. The data “EOD” indicates the end of the whole textdata, and a character string “NULL” shown in the figure represents aportion without data items.

Referring to FIG. 53A, four bits at the head of each two-byte character(code) indicate a code for discrimination of a kind of data. [7] HEX inhexadecimal for b15 to b12, that is, [0111] in binary notationdesignates that the data is edit information, and codes other than[0111] designate that the data are character data.

Referring to FIG. 53B, the line head data arranged at the head of acharacter information item has a first byte indicating that the same isthe line head data of edit information, and a second byte thereofindicating a music number as an information number. As shown in thefigure, the music number (information number) is a numerical valuewithin a range of (number) 0 to 255 represented by eight bits from bitnumbers b07 to b00. The number “0” designates a title line, whereas whena number is between “1” and “255”, the number designates a music number(i.e. information number). It should be noted that end-indicating data“EOD” may be a simple fixed value (data) (see FIG. 53C).

On the other hand, as described above with reference to FIG. 9, thedisplay 4 displaying the character information items includes theindicator display block 4 i and the character display block 4 c. Asdescribed above with reference to FIGS. 11A and 11B, the characterdisplay block 4 c has two basic units of control, i.e. two forms ofdisplay to be controlled. One of the two forms of display is afull-size/half-size display shown in FIG. 11A. In this case, thecharacter display block 4 c is controlled by being divided into asub-display block at a left end, indicated by coordinates CE and CF, fordisplaying data of two images in a 8×8 dot matrix, and a main displayblock for displaying data of eight images each in a 8×16 dot matrix.

As described hereinbefore with reference to FIG. 21 and the like, eachmusic number (information number) out of the above character informationitems is displayed on the sub-display block, while general characterdata, such as a title, a music title or the like, is displayed on themain display block (G11, for instance). In this case, each music number(information number) is displayed on the sub-display block, in a mannersuch that digits thereof are displayed in respective two 8×8 dotmatrices (hereinafter referred to as “the digit display portions”) eachdesignated by coordinates CE and CF. That is, the music number(information number) is displayed on the sub-display block in a verticalarrangement as shown in FIG. 21, in other words, the displayed digitsare arranged one above another in a direction orthogonal to thedirection of a sequence of the music number.

As described above, in the character information display method used inthe tape printing apparatus 1, at least part of desired characterinformation (music title) and an information number (music number)corresponding thereto are simultaneously displayed on the display screen41 having a character information display block (main display block)which is capable of displaying at least part of desired characterinformation (music title, for instance) and information number displayblock (sub-display block) which is capable of displaying a desiredinformation number (music number).

When the direction of a sequence of characters forming a characterstring of character information (music title) displayed on the characterinformation display block (main display block) is defined as a firstdirection (horizontal direction in the illustrated example), theinformation number display block (sub-display block) has a plurality ofdigit display portions arranged in a second direction (verticaldirection in the figure) orthogonal to the first direction, and displaysinformation number (music number) in digits corresponding in number tothe number of digit display portions, such that the number of each digitof the information number (music number) is displayed on a correspondingdigit display portion.

That is, the direction (first direction) of a sequence of charactersforming a character string of character information (music title)displayed on the character information display block (main displayblock) and the direction (second direction) of a sequence of digits ofinformation number displayed on the information number display block(sub-display block) are orthogonal to each other, so that even if thedisplay screen is small in size, further even if an information numberand corresponding character information are displayed in a manneradjacent to each other, it is possible to easily discriminate adisplayed information number (music number) from corresponding characterinformation (music title). It should be noted that in this case, aninformation number may be arranged either in horizontal writing or invertical writing in the second direction (direction orthogonal to adirection of a character string or sequence of characters of thecharacter information).

Further, as clearly shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, the size of theinformation number display block (sub-display block) in the seconddirection (vertical direction in the figure) coincides with the size ofthe character information display block (main display block) in thesecond direction, and the size of the information number display block(sub-display block) in the first direction (horizontal direction in thefigure) is equal to a size or one half of the size (one half of thesize, in the above example) required for displaying a full-sizecharacter in the first direction in the character information displayblock (main display block). That is, the size of the area of theinformation number display block is equal to or half the size of an areawhich is required for arranging a full-size character or full-sizecharacters in a line in the vertical direction as required when a lineor lines of full-size character(s) is(are) arranged in the characterinformation display block. If the character information display blockdisplays a line of characters, the area of the information numberdisplay block becomes equal to an area for a full-size character or ahalf of the area.

In this case, in the information number display block are displayeddigits or numerals, and hence if they are reduced in size and aplurality thereof are arranged in the second direction for display, theyare easy to recognize. For instance, if a plurality of digits of numberarranged in the second direction are displayed in an area for arranginga full-size or half-size character, a display area can be reduced insize, thereby enhancing display efficiency. Further, the informationnumber display block is small in size, so that if the display screenhaving the same area is used, the character information display blockcan be accordingly increased in size.

Further, the size of the information number display block in the seconddirection is equal to that of the character information display block inthe second direction. Hence, an information number and a correspondingcharacter information are easily displayed in a manner adjacent to eachother. That is, the area of the whole display screen can be reduced,which makes it possible to apply the character information displaymethod to a character processing device having a small-size displayscreen. Therefore, according to the character information display methodapplied to the tape printing apparatus 1, even if the method is appliedto a character processing device having only a small-sized displayscreen, information number (music number) and a corresponding characterinformation (music title) can be easily distinguished from each other,and at the same time the display efficiency of the character processingdevice can be improved.

Further, the information number display block (sub-display block) andthe character information display block (main display block) arearranged in a manner adjacent to each other, whereby an informationnumber (music number) and character information (music title) can becorrelated with each other to easily view or recognize the same.Further, by arranging the information number display block (sub-displayblock) and the character information display block (main display block)adjacent to each other, whereby the whole display screen having theblocks can be reduced in size, which makes it easy to apply thecharacter information display method to a character processing devicehaving only a small-sized display screen.

Further, in the above example, the size (18 dots) of the digit displayportion (indicated by coordinates CE or CF shown in FIG. 11A) in thesecond direction (vertical direction in the figure) is equal to one halfof the size (16 dots) required for displaying a full-size character inthe second direction in the character information display block (maindisplay block). Therefore, if the character information display block(main display block) displays one line of characters (corresponding tothe examples in FIGS. 11A and 11B, FIGS. 12A to 12E), 2-digitinformation number can be displayed, and if the character informationdisplay block (main display block) displays two lines of characters,4-digit information number can be displayed. That is, 2-digitinformation number can be displayed in the second direction for everyline of the character information display block (main display block),and an information number having twice the density of display can bedisplayed, which enhances display efficiency. Moreover, the informationnumber is displayed in a manner arranged in the second directionorthogonal to the first direction. Therefore, the information number andthe corresponding character information can be easily distinguished fromeach other.

Further, when character information (title) not corresponding to aninformation number is contained in character information to be displayedon the character information display block (main display block), and thecharacter information is displayed as an arbitrary characterinformation, a predetermined symbol or figure (e.g. mark D describedwith reference to FIGS. 20A to 20C) for notifying the user of the factis displayed on the information number display block (sub-display block)in place of the information number (see FIG. 20C), so that from thesymbol or figure, the user can recognize the fact (i.e. that thecharacter information is a disc title) with ease. In this case, it ispreferred that a D-shaped symbol or the like, which the user canassociate with the disc title, for instance, is used as the abovesymbol.

Next, an operation guide method as one of the display (notification,guide) -related methods of the tape printing apparatus 1 as a characterprocessing device will be described.

As described above, generally, an editing device for editing characterinformation, a printer for printing the edited character information,and the like, are provided with a character information display devicehaving a display screen for entering and editing character information,and checking the resulting character information.

In a word processor or the like, when the user sets or configuresvarious functions (for editing and printing) and modes, he depresses afunction key, such as an escape key or the like to cause a selectionscreen to be displayed on the display screen for selectively settingfunctions and modes. On the selection screen are displayed a pluralityof options which can be selected, and the user designates a function hedesires to set by operating the cursor to select the same and depressingthe return (line feed, selection or determining) key, or designates thesame by clicking a mouse for selection. Further, icons representative offunctions may be provided at a periphery or peripheral portions in thedisplay screen to permit the use to click the same (for instance, aplurality of options are displayed by clicking on a right-hand button ofthe mouse, and determines the selection by clicking on a left-handbutton of the same), for more direct selection of a function or editcharacter information.

Further, even when the user forgets how to edit during editing ofcharacter information, the user can make use of a help function (byactivating the same through depressing a help key), by displaying anedit operation-explaining (guide) screen which explains edit functionsand edit operations, thereby grasping and ascertaining details ofoperations. Further, there is also provided a word processor which iscapable of displaying a search entry screen as a screen similar to theoperation guide screen. The search entry screen permits the user toinput what he (she) desires to know, as key words.

As described above, the character processing apparatus having alarge-sized display screen, such as the word processor, is capable ofdisplaying, in a large-sized display screen thereof, an operation guidescreen, such as a selection screen (selection operation guide screen)for displaying a plurality of options to provide a guide for variousselection operations, and an edit operation explanation screen (editoperation guide screen; icons may be regarded as similar screens forindicating details of operations by showing figures and the like) forexplaining (providing a guide for) details of edit functions and editoperations. This enables the user to clearly grasp details of operationson the display screen. That is, it is possible to carry out selectionoperations and edit operations with reference to images displayed on theoperation guide screen.

However, in a relatively small-sized character processing apparatus,such as a tape printing apparatus, a stamp making apparatus and thelike, although it is a data processing device of the same kind, adisplay screen thereof is small in size, so that it is difficult todisplay an operation guide screen of the above-mentioned kind, which iscapable of showing details of selection operations and edit operations.

On the other hand, there is also provided a character processing deviceof the above-mentioned kind, which has a small-sized display screen buthas an information number display block in the display screen fordisplaying line numbers of character information and information number,such as character string numbers or the like. This information numberdisplay block, however, is used only for displaying characterinformation corresponding to an information number.

Therefore, the tape printing apparatus 1 employs a character processingdevice including a character information display block for displayingcharacter information in the display screen and information numberdisplay block for displaying an information number corresponding to thecharacter information, while adopting an operation guide method forpermitting the user to know details of selection operations and editoperations. In the following, the operation guide method will bedescribed in detail.

First, the tape printing apparatus 1 is a character processing devicehaving a character information display block (main display block) fordisplaying character information (music title) in a display screen(display screen 41 of the display 4) and an information number displayblock (sub-display block) for displaying information number (musicnumber) corresponding to the character information.

Further, in the tape printing apparatus 1, to prompt (guide) the user tooperate the cursor for selecting an option, operation guide charactersfor providing a guide for the cursor operations, that is, up and downarrow marks indicative of operating directions corresponding tooperations of the up arrow key 33U and the down arrow key 33D aredisplayed in the sub-display block. These arrow keys are displayed e.g.in the screens (G27 to G28) displaying options for selecting thefull-size code data or the half-size code data in the read processdescribed above with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23, the screens (G42 toG44) displaying options for selecting the kind of a label to be printedand formed in the printing process described above with reference toFIG. 24, the screens (G72 and G73) displaying options for selecting anadjustment item in the function selecting/setting mode described abovewith reference to FIG. 44, the screens (G75 to G78) for selecting aprinting position-adjusting function at the first level described abovewith reference to FIG. 45, and further the screens (G81 to G85) forselecting an adjustment value for adjusting the printing position at thesecond level.

That is, according to the operation guide method applied to the tapeprinting apparatus 1, when providing a guide for a next operation(selection operation, for instance), character information to bemanipulated is displayed in the character information display block(main display block) and at the same time an operation guide character(cursor operation guide character indicating the operation of the cursorin a predetermine direction) indicative of at least one of candidatesfor a next operation is displayed in the information number displayblock (sub-display block).

As a result, the user can grasp details of operations on the displayscreen, and carry out next selection and edit operations with referenceto operation guide characters displayed in the information numberdisplay block. Therefore, according to the tape printing apparatus 1, itis possible to notify the user of details of operations, such asselection operations and the like, by adopting the operation guidemethod.

Although in the above example, the operation guide for providing a guidefor selection operation is described, in the tape printing apparatus 1,the above operation guide method is adopted in edit operations, such ascharacter conversions, as well.

Referring to FIG. 54, when the user depresses the conversion mode key37S in the basic entry mode in a state (G96) where the cursor K isplaced on a right side of a first “” (on a left side of “”) of acharacter string “”, the screen is changed to the Kana/Kanji conversionmode to designate a Hiragana letter “” as a first letter to be converted(G97), so that the user can designate the range of characters to beconverted (or the position of a last character to be converted) byoperating the right arrow key 33R from this state (G97). The right arrowmark (“→”) shown in the sub-display block provides a guide for thecursor operation therefor.

When the user depresses the right arrow key 33R according to the guide,the designated range is expanded to Hiragana letters “”. When the userdepresses the right arrow key 33R twice more, the designated range isexpanded to Hiragana letters “”. That is, by operating the cursor (theright arrow key 33R×3), the user designates the range of Hiraganaletters “” (phonogramic letters pronounced as “koukai”) as acharacter-converting range. (G98).

In this state (G98), the user can operate the right arrow key 33R toexpand the character-converting range. Therefore, the operation guidecharacter (cursor operation guide character:right arrow mark “→”) forguiding the cursor operation is displayed in the sub-display block.However, the left arrow key 33L can be also depressed from this state(G98) to reduce the designated range. Therefore, the apparatus 1 may beconfigured such that both the right and left arrow marks are displayedas operation guide characters. Further, when an original characterstring includes a Kanji letter(s), if the right arrow key 33R isoperated to cover Kanji letter, it is possible to delete the arrow markof the operation guide character and display another mark (indicating anerror, for instance).

On the other hand, by depressing the conversion key 37 in this state,the user can determine the character-converting range to permit theprocess to proceed to an operation for converting characters. That is,when the conversion key 37 is depressed, next, Kanji letters “”(ideographic characters pronounced as “koukai”) are displayed as a firstcandidate character for conversion (G99).

The user operates the conversion key 37 or the right arrow key 33R fromthe above state (G99), to thereby sequentially display differentcandidate characters (Kanji letters as candidates for conversion). Theright arrow mark (“→”) shown in the sub-display block provides a guidefor the cursor operation.

When the user depresses the right arrow key 33R according to the guide,Kanji letters “” (ideographic characters pronounced as “koukai”) aredisplayed as a second candidate (G100), so that if the Kanji letters areto be selected, it is possible to finally determine or set the convertedcharacters to the Kanji letters “” by depressing the enter key 38. Whenthe converted characters are determined, the screen returns to the basicentry mode, while the state (G96) of the first character string “”(being displayed is changed into the state (G101) of a convertedcharacter string “” being displayed.

Further, similarly to the case of the character-converting range beingchanged (G98), etc., the user can further depress the right arrow key33R, in the state of the Kanji letters “” being displayed withoutdepressing the enter key 38, to sequentially display Kanji letters froma third candidate in the order of “”→“”→“”→“_z,12 ”→“” (all thesetwo-character phrases are pronounced as “koukai” which can be written as“” in phonogramic representation using Hiragana letters). Inversely, itis also possible to display candidates in reverse order by depressingthe left arrow key 33L. In this case as well, the apparatus 1 may beconfigured such that both the right and left arrow marks are displayedas operation guide characters.

As described above, the operation guide method is applied to the tapeprinting apparatus 1 regarded as a character processing device which hasa character information display block (main display block) capable ofdisplaying character information (music title) in a display screen 41and an information number display block (sub-display block) capable ofdisplaying an information number (music number) corresponding to thecharacter information, and to provide a guide for next cursor operation,displays a character information to be manipulated in the characterinformation display block and an operation guide character indicative ofat least one of next candidates of operation.

As a result, the user can grasp details of operations on the displayscreen and carry out next selection operations and edit operations withreference to operation guide characters displayed on the informationnumber display block. That is, according to the operation guide method,it is possible to provide a guide for details of operations, such asselection operations and edit operations.

More specifically, as described above, the operation guide charactersinclude a cursor operation guide character(s) indicative of a cursoroperation(s) in one or more predetermined directions of upward,downward, leftward and rightward directions, and hence the user cangrasp cursor operations for carrying out next selection/edit operationson the display screen and carry out next selection/edit operations withreference to cursor operation guide characters displayed in theinformation number display block. That is, in this case, it is possibleto provide a guide for cursor operations for carrying out nextselection/edit operations.

Further, the above cursor operation guide character(s) is/are anarrow-shaped mark(s) indicative of a cursor operation(s) in at least onepredetermined direction, so that the user can easily grasp directions ofoperations to be carried out by cursor operation by viewing the arrowmarks. That is, in this case, it is possible to provide a guide for thecursor operations by displaying arrow marks of the information numberdisplay block.

Further, as described above, when providing a guide for a selectionoperation as a next operation to be carried out, character informationcorresponding to any of a plurality of options selected in the selectionoperation is displayed as the character information to be manipulated.When the operation indicated by the operation guide character iseffected, character information corresponding to a next one of theoptions is displayed as a next character information to be manipulated.

Therefore, the user is capable of carrying out the operation indicatedby the operation guide character as a next operation in the state ofcharacter information corresponding to any of a plurality of optionsbeing displayed, to thereby cause character information corresponding toa next one of the plurality of options to be displayed. That is, whenproviding a guide for a selection operation as a next operation to becarried out, it is possible to provide a guide for an operation fordisplaying character information corresponding to a next one of theplurality of options by using the operation guide character(s), in thestate of character information corresponding to any of a plurality ofoptions being displayed.

Further, by way of an example of another operation, when providing aguide for an edit operation as a next operation to be carried out, asdescribed above, character information to be edited is displayed as thecharacter information to be manipulated, and when this operationindicated by the operation guide character as the next operation iscarried out, a position or a range to be edited in the characterinformation is changed. That is, by providing a guide for an editoperation as a next operation, in the state of character information tobe edited being displayed, it is possible to provided a guide for theoperation for changing a position or a range to be edited in thecharacter information, by using the operation guide character(s).

Now, the edit operation described above is an operation for carrying outcharacter conversions, so that when providing a guide for a characterconversion operation (edit operation) as a next operation to be carriedout, in the state of the character information to be converted beingdisplayed, it is possible to provide a guide for an operation forchanging a position or a range to be converted in the characterinformation, by using the operation guide character(s).

Further, as described hereinbefore with reference to FIGS. 9, 11A, 11B,21 and the like, in the tape printing apparatus 1, the informationnumber display block (sub-display block) is arranged in a manneradjacent to the character information display block (main displayblock), so that an information number (music number, for instance) andcharacter information (music title) can be correlated with each other topermit them to be easily viewed or recognized. Further, by arrangingthese blocks adjacent to each other, operation guide character(s)displayed in the information number display block (sub-display block)and the character information displayed in the character informationdisplay block (main display block) for manipulation as well can becorrelated with each other to permit them to be easily viewed orrecognized. Further, by arranging these blocks adjacent to each other,the whole display screen having the two blocks can be reduced in size,and hence the operation guide method can be employed without anyproblems by the tape printing apparatus 1 (character processing device)having only a small-sized display screen.

Although in the above example, for instance, character information forconversion, that is, character information to be manipulated is a musictitle, this is not limitative, but since a title (disc title) is also tobe converted, it is possible to provide a similar guide for an operationfor the title. In this case, in the normal state, a D mark, whichdesignates that the same is a title (disc title), is displayed in theinformation number display block (sub-display block) in place of aninformation number (music number). However, this can be regarded as asimilar case where the music title of music number “0” is used as atitle, so that the present method can be applied to this case withoutany problems. This is, character information showing a title (disctitle) can be set to an object to be displayed, and by using thecharacter information as the character information to be manipulated, aguide for various operations can be provided.

Next, character processing (input, conversion and the like)-relatedmethods of the tape printing apparatus 1 will be described. First ofall, a character conversion method applied to the tape printingapparatus 1, more particularly, a character conversion method ofconverting Hiragana letters will be described. It should be noted thatnow the term “character conversion” is used to mean a characterconversion for converting a character string having one or morecharacters to another character string indicative of the same meaning,e.g. phonogramic character(s) to ideographic character(s).

As devices capable of carrying out character conversion of this kind,there are a personal computer having word processing software installedtherein and a device dedicatedly provided for word processing (so-calledword processor). In the word processor and the like, both in Romaji(alphabetic) entry mode and Kana entry mode, characters are basicallyentered in Hiragana letters. When Kana/Kanji conversion (predeterminedcharacter conversion) is designated, the Kana/Kanji conversion iscarried out with reference to a Kana/Kanji conversion table (dictionary)for converting Hiragana letters to Kanji letters.

On the other hand, there is a character entry device, such as the MDplayer 90 connected to the tape printing apparatus 1, which has thefunction of entering characters not as a main function but simply as anaccessory function. Since a character entry device of this kind does nothave a large-sized display screen, half-size characters, such asalphanumeric characters and Hiragana letters, are usually used therein.Further, Katakana letters congenial with a small-sized display screencomprised of LCD are used more frequently than Hiragana letters havingdelicate curved portions. Therefore, character strings input by acharacter entry device of this kind are mainly Katakana letters, so thata Kana/Kanji conversion table of the general type for convertingHiragana letters to Kanji letters is useless in the device.

Further, even if a Katakana/Kanji conversion table (dictionary) forconverting Katakana letters to Kanji letters is provided, and Katakanaletters can be converted to Kanji letters, Katakana letters and Kanjiletters are not congenial with each other, so that it is difficult toregard a character string comprised of a mixture of Katakana letters andKanji letters as a natural one. For instance, if a character stringcomprised of Katakana letters “” is converted to a character stringcomprised of a mixture of Katakana letters and a Kanji letter “”,declensional Kana ending added in Katakana after a Kanji letter is feltunnatural or causes the user to feel a sense of disorder.

To eliminate these inconveniences, the tape printing apparatus 1 employsa character conversion method which is capable of converting Hiraganaletters to Kanji letters, while being capable of converting even acharacter string mainly comprised of Katakana letters to one comprisedof a mixture of Hiragana letters and Kanji letters through simpleoperations, even if predetermined character conversion-designatingmeans, such as a function key or the like, is not additionally providedin the apparatus or the Katakana/Kanji conversion table (dictionary) isnot provided. In the following, the character conversion method will bedescribed in detail.

As described above with reference to FIG. 19, by depressing theconversion mode key 37S in the basic entry mode (H1), the screen can bechanged to the Kana/Kanji conversion mode (H4). Referring to FIG. 56,immediately after the conversion mode key 37S is depressed in the basicentry mode to change the screen to the Kana/Kanji conversion mode (H4),first, the kind of a letter next to the cursor K is determined at stepS91.

For instance, from the state (G96) of the screen being in the basicentry mode, described above with reference to FIG. 54, by effecting theabove determination (S91), it is determined that a letter “” in thecharacter string “”, next to the cursor K, is a Hiragana letter. Then,as shown in FIG. 56, the flow proceeds to the Hiragana/Kanji conversionprocess (S92), and the Kana/Kanji conversion is carried out through theoperations described above with reference to FIG. 54 (G97 to G100),followed by returning to the screen in the basic entry mode at step S90(G101).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55, when in the basic entry mode(G90), from the state (G91) of a character sting comprised of Katakanaletters “” being displayed, if part of the character string “” isdirectly converted, “” is obtained, which is an unnatural characterstring.

Therefore, in the tape printing apparatus 1, in the state (G91) of theKatakana letters “” being displayed in the basic entry mode, as shown inFIG. 56, when the conversion mode key 37S is depressed for changing thescreen display, and, after it is determined at step S91 that the letternext to the cursor K (for instance, “” in FIG. 55) is a Katakana letter,the Katakana/Hiragana conversion is carried out at step S93.

In this case, however, differently from the case of Kana/Kanjiconversion being carried out, the whole area of the sequence ofcharacters is defined as a range to be converted. For instance, if acharacter string displayed in the basic entry mode is a character stringof a title, the whole area of the character string (title) is set to therange to be converted, or if the character string displayed is that of amusic title, the whole area of the music title of a music number is setto the range to be converted.

In the FIG. 55 example, the whole area of the Katakana letters “” is setto the range to be converted, and first, a corresponding characterstring of Hiragana letters “” is displayed before determining theentries (G92). Then, when the user checks the display and depresses theenter key 38, the new character string, that is, the entry of Hiraganaletters “” is determined, followed by returning to the screen in thebasic entry mode at step S90 (G90).

This state of the screen in the basic entry mode is the same as that ofa character string of Hiragana letters originally entered beingdisplayed. For instance, the user operates the left arrow key 33L suchthat the character next to (character on the right side of) the cursor Kbecomes a Hiragana letter “” (G94), and thereafter, depresses theconversion mode key 37S. Next, the user designates the Hiragana letters“” as a range to be converted and depresses the enter key 38, whereby he(she) can convert the character string to a character string “”. Then,by carrying out the operation described above with reference to FIG. 54,the user can obtain the desired character string of a mixture ofHiragana letters and Kanji letters, “” (G101 in FIG. 54).

As described above, according to the character conversion method appliedto the tape printing apparatus 1, when the Hiragana/Kanji conversion(Kana/Kanji conversion) is instructed (the conversion mode key 37S isdepressed), character conversion is carried out assuming thatKatakana/Hiragana conversion “” replacement) is instructed forconvention of a desired portion or predetermined portion or all (in theabove example, predetermined whole area) of Katakana letters included ina displayed character string to Hiragana letters if a character(character next to the cursor K) designated by to-be-convertedcharacter-designating means at a time point of instruction of theHiragana/Kanji conversion is a Katakana letter. Accordingly, it ispossible to instruct the Katakana/Hiragana conversion “” replacement) byusing character conversion-instructing means (conversion mode key 37S)instructing the Hiragana/Kanji conversion (Kana/Kanji conversion),without providing character conversion-instructing means for instructingthe Katakana/Hiragana conversion “” replacement).

Further, in the above case, characters converted assuming that theKatakana/Hiragana conversion is instructed are converted to Hiraganaletters, and then, if the Hiragana/Kanji conversion is instructed by thesame predetermined character conversion-instructing means, the Hiraganaletters can be converted to Kanji letters. Therefore, it is possible toconvert even a character string mainly comprised of Katakana letters toone comprised of a mixture of Hiragana letters and Kanji letters throughsimple operations, even if predetermined characterconversion-designating means, such as a function key or the like, is notadditionally provided in the apparatus or the Katakana/Kanji conversiontable (dictionary) is not provided.

Further, in the above case, to-be-converted character-designating meansis cursor operation means (cursor key 33) for operating the cursor K fordesignating a position or area to be converted in the display screen 41,and hence it is possible to designate a position or area of characters(Hiragana letters) to be subjected to the Hiragana/Kanji conversionthrough a simple cursor operation of the general type.

Although in the above example, an area to be converted is not designatedin the Katakana/Hiragana conversion process but the whole area of asequence of characters is set to the area to be converted, this is notlimitative, but a position or area to be converted may be designated inthe Katakana/Hiragana conversion as well, similarly to the case of theHiragana/Kanji conversion. In this case, it is possible to designate theposition or area of characters (Katakana) to be subjected to theKatakana/Hiragana conversion through a simple cursor operation.

Further, in the character conversion method applied to the tape printingapparatus 1, as shown in FIG. 56, when the Hiragana/Kanji conversion isinstructed (conversion mode key 37S is depressed), if a character(character next to the cursor K) designated by to-be-convertedcharacter-designating means at a time point of instruction of theHiragana/Kanji conversion is not a Hiragana letter or a Katakana letter,the screen is changed to a screen displaying an error message to notifythe user of occurrence of an error at step S94, followed by returning tothe screen in the basic entry mode after the lapse of a predeterminedtime period. That is, it is possible to cause the user to recognizewrong operations by notifying him (her) occurrence of an error tothereby prompt the user to carry out a correct operation again.

Further, a character string input by a device permitting entry of onlyKatakana letters and alphanumeric characters is mainly formed ofKatakana letters, and in this case, the user sometimes desires tocollectively convert a predetermined range of Katakana letters toHiragana letters, instead of designating the position or area to beconverted finely.

In such a case, as shown in the above example, when character conversionis carried out assuming that the Katakana/Hiragana conversion isinstructed, if it is possible to collectively convert all the Katakanaletters in the predetermined area of a character string, characterconversion can be effected through a simple operation. It should benoted that in this case, the predetermined area collectively convertibleto Hiragana letters may be a predetermined range by default or may be apredetermined area arrangeable as desired. Further, it is moreconvenient if a predetermined range set by default is used before it isparticularly designated.

Further, in the above case, the predetermined area collectivelyconvertible to Hiragana letters is set to the range of one lineincluding a displayed character string defined by automatic or arbitrarynew line start, whereby all the Katakana letters within the range of theone line can be collectively converted, which enables theKatakana/Hiragana conversion to be effected through simple operations.

Of course, as described above, by setting the predetermined area forcollective conversion to a range of one line or a sequence of aplurality of lines including a displayed character string defined in apredetermined manner (for instance, in the above example, the whole of amusic title corresponding to a music number: corresponding to a range ofone line in the case of a short music title represented in one line), itis possible to collectively convert all the Katakana letters within therange of the sequence of lines. This enables the Katakana/Hiraganaconversion to be effected through simple operations.

Next, a character entry method as one of the character processing(input, conversion and the like)-related methods of the tape printingapparatus 1 will be described.

As a character entry device for inputting character strings eachcomprised of one or more characters (used to mean characters includingKanji letters, Hiragana letters, Katakana letters, numerals,alphanumeric characters and symbols (including simple figures)), thereare provide a so-called word processor and the like. The word processorand the like have the function of switching between Romaji entry modeand Kana entry mode or between capital letters and small letters, whilehaving a keyboard (key entry device) capable of separately inputting anumber of characters larger in number than that of all Kana letters orthat of all alphabetical letters.

On the other hand, there is contemplated a character entry device of atype which is capable of selectively displaying one of a predeterminednumber of characters, in a predetermine order in a manner switching fromone character to another, for selection of a desired one of thecharacters, to thereby permit entry of a desired character by using asmall number of keys (Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication (Kokai) No.58-76930).

In the above-mentioned character entry method, however, it is relativelyeasy to find out a desired character from a character group or setcomprised of a small number of characters, such as alphabetical letters,but it is difficult to find out a desired character from a charactergroup or set comprised of a large number of characters, such as Kana(i.e. Hiragana and Katakana) letters and further Kanji letters). Inother words, in the case of e.g. Kana letters and further Kanji letters,there is no inevitability in the arrangement or sequence of charactersdisplayed as a candidate, so that to find out an undisplayed character,it is required to move a cursor in one direction or another to switchdisplayed characters, that is, look for an undisplayed character bytrial and error.

Originally, when inputting a character group or set comprised of a smallnumber of characters, such as alphabetical letters, the character entrymethod as described above cannot provide an advantageous effect over theprovision of all keys for entering the characters of the group or set.It is only when characters of a character group or set comprised of alarge number of characters are input that the above method of enteringcharacters by using a small number of keys provides the advantageouseffect. However, if a large number of characters are to be input, such acharacter entry method is useless due to its degraded operability.

Further, in order to eliminate any of the above inconveniences at all,to provide a large-sized display screen which is capable of displaying alarger number of candidate characters to be entered for enhancingoperability thereof results in increased size and manufacturing cost ofa key entry device, so that the same can not be applied to a devisewhich is desired to have a reduced number of keys for reduction in sizeand manufacturing costs thereof. This hinders the above character entrymethod and device from being put into practical use.

Therefore, the tape printing apparatus 1 employs a character entrymethod which enables characters to be entered by using a small number ofkeys and a small-sized display screen without spoiling operabilitythereof. In the following, the character entry method will be describedin detail. It should be noted that the following description is madeassuming that the Japanese language-adapted type of the tape printingapparatus 1 is operated to characters including Hiragana “” letters,Katakana (“”) letters, and Kanji (“”) letters.

As described with reference to FIG. 19, to input characters (orsymbols), the character key 34C is depressed (when symbols are input,the symbol key 34D is depressed) from the state of the edit mode beingthe basic entry mode, whereby the basic entry mode is changed to acharacter (or symbol) selection entry mode (H2 or H3).

For instance, as shown in FIG. 57, when the character key 34C isdepressed in the state of the basic entry mode (G110), the basic entrymode is changed to the character selection/entry mode, and at a firstlevel, an option “” is displayed (G111). When the delete key 35 isdepressed from this state (G111), the edit mode returns to the basicentry mode (G110). Further, when the symbol key 34D is depressed, theedit mode is changed to a symbol selection/entry mode. Furthermore, whenthe enter key 38 is depressed, the display screen is changed to a secondlevel.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58, whenever the character key 34C or theright arrow key 33R or the down arrow key 33D is depressed from thisstate (G111), options are sequentially displayed in a circular manner,such as “” (Hiragana)→“” (Katakana)→“” (alphabet)→“” (numeral)→“”(Kanji)→“” (Hiragana) (G111˜G115˜G116 (identical to G111)), whereaswhenever the left arrow key 33L or the up arrow key 33U is depressed,the options are sequentially displayed in a reverse direction in acircular manner, such that “”→“”→“”→“”→“”→“” (G116˜G112˜G111).

In the following, the character entry method will be described in detailby taking the Hiragana entry mode as an example. Referring to FIG. 59,when the character key 34C is depressed in the basic entry mode (G120:the same as G110 in FIG. 57), as described above, the screen is changedto the first level of the character selection/entry mode to display “”(Hiragana) (G121: the same as G111). When the enter key 38 is depressedin this state (G121), the screen is changed to the screen displaying thesecond level, that is, the screen for selecting and inputtingcharacters. In this state (G112), candidate characters for entry aredisplayed in a form shown in FIGS. 60A to 60C.

As shown in FIGS. 60A and 60B, a selection screen (G122) for selectingcharacters is divided into five display areas (five blocks) forcontrolling. An area at a left end of 24 dots (in the horizontaldirection) displays images each in a 6×8 dot matrix, as described abovewith reference to FIG. 11B. Assuming that an upper display area havingcoordinates A0 to A3 is defined as a first block, whereas when a lowerdisplay block having coordinates B0 to B3 as a second block (see FIGS.60B and 11B), characters “CODE” are always displayed in the first block,to notify the user that the lower second block designates a charactercode.

The other three display areas are controlled by full-size/half-sizedisplay, described above with reference to FIG. 11A. Assuming that adisplay block indicated by coordinates C2 to C3 is a third block, adisplay block indicated by coordinates C4 to C5 a fourth block, and adisplay block indicated by coordinates C6 to C7 a fifth block, acandidate character for entry is displayed in each of the third to thefifth blocks, and the character displayed particularly in the fourthblock is set to an entry designation character at the time point ofdisplay.

Further, in the second block, the value of the character code of thecharacter displayed in the fourth block, that is, the entry designationcharacter is displayed. Referring to FIG. 59, when the enter key 38 isdepressed in the state of the option “” at the first level of thecharacter selection entry mode being displayed (G121) to change thescreen to a selection/entry screen for selecting/entering characters atthe second level, first, a character selected and determined on theimmediately preceding occasion is displayed. Now, for clarity ofdescription, let it be assumed that a Hiragana letter “” is displayed asa first entry designation character (displayed at the time point ofinitialization) under the option “” (G122).

For instance, when the Hiragana letter “” is displayed as the entrydesignation character, in the third block, a small Hiragana letter “” isdisplayed adjacent to a front side (left side) of the Hiragana letter“”, and in the fifth block, a small Hiragana letter is “” is displayedadjacent to a rear side (right side) of the Hiragana letter “”. That is,in the third to fifth blocks are displayed a plurality of (three)candidate characters adjacent to each other.

Further, in the second block, a character code corresponding to theentry designation character, i.e. the character displayed in the fourthblock out of the displayed candidate characters is displayed. In thepresent embodiment, Japanese graphic character code of JIS is adopted asa predetermined character code (more accurately, Japanese graphiccharacter code of JIS for use with the MD system is adopted, however,the same code is used for the Hiragana letters “”), so that [0402] DEC(hereinafter each decimal is represented by “[] DEC”) is shown in thesecond block as the character code of the Hiragana letter “” displayedin the fourth block (G122).

Although the value of each character code is represented as a number(corresponding to the code number) having digits thereof displayed asrespective 6×8 image in 6×8 dot matrix images in the lower four areas ofthe second block, the display of a thousandth digit in a value equal toor less than [999] DEC (that is, a number of three figures) is omitted.Further, as for [10000] DEC to [10999] DEC, [11000] DEC to [11999] DEC,[12000]DEC to [12999] DEC, the vale of each character code is a numberhaving five digits, and hence a corresponding one of character imagesdedicatedly provided for display, as shown in FIG. 60C, is used torepresent the upper two digits of each of these values of charactercodes to thereby display the whole code number in the display area.

First, in tape printing apparatus 1 (in the character entry methodapplied thereto), a predetermined kind-of-character array table isdefined, in which a plurality of characters classified into at least oneof predetermined kinds of characters, such as Kanji letters, Hiraganaletters, Katakana letters, numerals, alphabetic characters and symbols,are caused to correspond to the character codes thereof, and thecharacters and their codes are arranged into a plurality of lines and aplurality of columns according to a predetermined rule, to thereby forma two-dimensional arrangement.

Assuming that a character located at a j-th column and an i-th row (iand j represent natural numbers) is defined as a character atcoordinates [i, j] in the array table (hereinafter simply referred to as“character at [i, j]”), if Hiragana letters (“”) are taken as an exampleof a predetermined kind of characters above, an array table as shown inFIG. 61 is defined, in which a plurality of characters classified intothe predetermined kind of character (Hiragana letters) are caused tocorrespond to the character codes thereof (Japanese graphic charactercode of JIS for use with the MD system), and the characters and theircodes are arranged into a plurality of (10 (i=1 to 10)) rows and aplurality of (15 (j=1 to 15)) columns according to a predetermined ruleto thereby form a two-dimensional arrangement.

Further, as to other kinds of characters, there are defined array tablesprovided for the cases of the characters being each set to thepredetermined kind of characters (Katakana letters (“”), see FIG. 68;alphabetic characters, see FIG. 69; numerals, see FIG. 70; and Kanjiletters, see FIG. 71).

Although the apparatus 1 according to the present embodiment isconfigured such that symbols can be selected in a symbol selection entrymode (see FIG. 19) in a manner correlated to the uses of symbols ratherthan according to the order of character codes (see FIGS. 75 to 78), itis possible to provide an array table according to the character codesto handle symbols similarly to the other kinds of characters. (see FIG.72).

Here, differences in properties or characteristics between Kana letters,i.e. Hiragana and Katakana letters, and the other alphabetic characters,numerals and Kanji letters will be described by referring to symbolswhich have intermediate properties or characteristics between these twogroups of characters.

In an array table shown in FIG. 72, symbols are simply arrangedaccording to values indicated by the character codes of “symbols” toform 12 rows and 10 columns (i=1 to 12, j=1 to 10), such that acharacter at an intersection of an i-th row and a j-th column is acharacter at [i, j].

When memorability for the user is taken into account, someone may be ofopinion that the user can understand and retain or memorize e.g. a FIG.73 array table more easily which is a modification of the FIG. 12 arraytable formed by shifting , a character “⋆” ([0189] DEC) at [9, 9] to acharacter “⊚” [0193] DEC at [10, 3] to a 10-throw, [0194] DEC at [10, 4]to [0207] DEC at [11, 7] to an 11-th row, and [0208] DEC to [0214] DECto a 12-th row.

Further, someone may be of opinion that the user can understand andretain e.g. a FIG. 74 array table more easily which is a modification ofthe FIG. 73 array table formed by increasing the number of columns to 11(j=1 to 11) shifting “″” ([0141] DEC) at [5, 1] to the end of the fourthrow as “″” ([0141] DEC) at [4, 11], and setting [0142] DEC to [0149] DECto the fifth row, [0150] DEC to [0159] DEC to the sixth row, and [0160]DEC to [0170] DEC to e.g. the seventh row.

Whether or not the FIG. 72 array table is easy to for the user to use orretain, or whether or not FIG. 74 is better, or further whether or notthere is something wrong in each array table can not be determined withease since it depends on the sense of each individual to some extent. Solong as it is clear that each array table is formed according topredetermined rules, these is little substantial difference betweenarrays, and hence it may be defined as desired.

On the other hand, in the FIG. 69 array table of alphabetic characters,since the total number of characters is small, the array can be easilyretained by the user. Therefore, a simple array table of 4 rows and 13columns (i=1 to 4, j=1 to 13) will do. A FIG. 70 array table (numeralarray table) may be formed of 4 rows and 10 columns (i=1 to 4, j=1 to13) for the same reason.

Further, in the case of a FIG. 71 array table (Kanji array table), thenumber of letters is so large that there is little merit in designingthe user's original array table, and moreover, if designed, such anarray table will be too complicated for the user to retain. Therefore,in the case of Kanji letters or the like, a simple array table havingletters arranged according to the order of numeric values of charactercodes is assumed to be convenient for use.

Next, in the case of Hiragana and Katakana letters, although the totalnumber of characters is so large that it is rather difficult for theuser to retain the same, the number is not extremely large, so thatthere is room for improvement in arrangement or array of charactercodes. However, since the number is not extremely small, it is requiredthat the user can retain and use the array with ease.

Hiragana and Katakana letters have an array of their own easier tounderstand than numerical values and known to Japanese language-usingpeople, that is, the array of the systematic table of the Japanesesyllabary. Therefore, in the character entry method applied to the tapeprinting apparatus 1, there are provided array tables for Hiragana andKatakana letters, arranged based on the systematic table of the Japanesesyllabary (see FIGS. 61 and 68).

Next, a basic character entry method and a designation-changing methodof changing the designation of entry designation characters will bedescribed.

For instance, on the selection/entry screen for selecting and inputtingcharacters “” (Hiragana letters), as described above with reference toFIGS. 59 to 60C, are displayed a plurality of (three) candidatecharacters including “” corresponding to the entry designation characterand “” and “” arranged immediately forward of and immediately afterwardof “” in the predetermined kind-of-character array table (see FIG. 61)Hiragana array table, and at the same time [0402] DEC as a charactercode corresponding to the entry designation character “” (G122).

When the enter key 38 is depressed in this state, as shown in FIG. 59,the entry designation character “” is determined as an entry character,and the entry character “” is inserted on the left side of the cursor K,followed by returning to the screen in the basic entry mode (G123).

On the other hand, when the right arrow key 33R is depressed in theabove state (G122), the designation of the entry designation characteris shifted from “” to “” on the right side of “”. Then, three characters“” “” “” are displayed as candidate characters for entry and [0403] DECis displayed as a character code corresponding to the entry designationcharacter “”.

Therefore, when the enter key 38 is depressed in this state, the entrydesignation character “” is determined as an entry character, similarlyto the case of “”, and the entry character “” is inserted on the leftside of the cursor K, followed by returning to the screen in the basicentry mode.

Similarly, when the right arrow key 33R is depressed in the state of “”being designated as the above entry designation character, thedesignation of the entry designation character is shifted from “” to “”on the right side of “”. Then, three characters “” “” “” are displayedas candidate characters for entry and [0404] DEC is displayed as acharacter code corresponding to the entry designation character “”. Ifthe enter key 38 is depressed in this state, “” is input.

That is, it is possible to change the designation of the entrydesignation character through cursor operations including other cursoroperations described hereinafter. When the designation is changed, a newentry designation character corresponding to the change and candidatecharacters for entry adjacent thereto are displayed, and at the sametime a character code corresponding to the entry designation characterat the time point is displayed.

Hereinafter, the rules for changing entry designation characters throughthis kind of operation of the cursor (operation of the cursor key 33)are referred to as “the scroll rules”. If only the entry designationcharacter can be changed, the following character entry procedure iscarried out by the same key operations as described above. Hence, thescroll rules for changing entry designation characters through operationof various cursor keys will be mainly described in the following.Further, description of candidate characters (arranged adjacent to, i.e.immediately forward and immediately afterward of) the entry designationcharacter displayed therewith will be omitted unless otherwise required,since their positions are clearly grasped if a corresponding entrydesignation character is designated.

Referring to FIG. 62, whenever the right arrow key 33R is depressed, theposition of an entry designation character is sifted rightward in theKana array table by one box (the character on the right side of thepresent entry designation character is designated as a new entrydesignation character). In short, the position of an entry designationcharacter is moved from the position of the above “” in the order of“”→“”→“”→“”→“”→“”→ . . . →“”.

Further, according to the scroll rules of the character entry methodapplied to the tape printing apparatus 1, the code of a character at theend of a desired one of a plurality of rows in an array table and thecode of a character at the head of the next row in the array table areprocessed as character codes adjacent to each other. This scroll rule iscommonly applied irrespective of the kinds of characters to be entered(that is, regardless of which array table including those shown in FIGS.68 to 74 is used in designating an entry designation character).

For instance, when the above letter “” is an entry designationcharacter, letters “”, “” and “” are displayed as candidate characters.If the designation is changed in a manner “”→“”, then letters “”, “” and“” are displayed as candidate characters. That is, character codes in aplurality of rows are handled as a sequence of character codes, andhence a character at the end of an immediately preceding row and acharacter at the head of a next row are handled as candidate charactersadjacent to each other.

Further, the character code at the end of the last row of a plurality ofrows in the array table and the character code at the head of the firstrow are handled as character codes adjacent to each other. For instance,when a Hiragana letter “” is an entry designation character, characters“”, “” and “”; are displayed as candidate characters, whereas ifdesignation is changed in a manner “”→“”, then letters “”, “” and “” aredisplayed as candidate characters. That is, since the rows of the tableform a circular sequence of character codes, a character at the end of alast row and a character at the head of a first row can be displayed ascandidate characters.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63, whenever the left arrow key 33L is depressed,the position of an entry designation character is shifted leftward onthe Kana array table by one box (the character on the left side of thepresent entry designation character is designated as a new entrydescription character). In short, the position of an entry designationcharacter (designation position) is moved from the position of the above“” in a manner “”→“”→“”→“”→ . . . →“”→“”→ . . . “”“”→. . . “”→“”→ . . .“” “” . . . → . . . →.

Although the above scroll rules are commonly applied irrespective of thekinds of characters, a scroll rule applied to cursor operations usingthe down arrow key 33D varies with the kinds of characters.

When a change in the character entry designation is carried out based onthe alphabetic character array table shown in FIG. 69, if “T”([0352]DEC) at [2, 7] is designated as an entry designation character and thedown arrow key 33D is depressed, the designation is changed to “g” at[3, 7] ([0371] DEC). This scroll rule conforms to the principles orarrangement of the table. This is true when the designation is changedaccording to the FIG. 70 numeral array table, the FIG. 71 Kanji arraytable, and the FIG. 74 symbol array table.

That is, the scroll rule in changing the character entry designationthrough operation of the down arrow key 33D is defined in a mannerconforming to principles, i.e. arrangement of each table such that thedesignation is changed from a character at [i, j] to a character at[i+1, j], except for Kana's (“” (Hiragana letters) and “” (Katakanaletters)).

On the other hand, when the entry designation character is changed basedon the array table of Kana, by depressing the down arrow key 33D, acharacter at the head of a next row is designated as the entrydesignation character. For instance, as illustrated in FIG. 64, while ahiragana letter'“” ([0417] DEC) at [2, 7] (see FIG. 61) is designated asthe entry designation character, if the down arrow key 33D is depressed,a hiragana letter “” ([0421] DEC) at [3, 1] is designated as the entrydesignation character. That is, according to the array table of theHiragana letters, it is defined that a first letter in a next (i+1) rowis designated.

This is because according to the systematic table of the Japanesesyllabary, characters in each of “(a)-headed row” to “(wa)-headed row”are customarily thought of from the first character in each row. Forinstance, assuming that to find a desired character the search isshifted from the fourth character “(ke)” in “ka)-headed row” to the nextrow i.e. “(sa)-headed row”, it is easier to start check from the firstcharacter “(sa)” in the “(sa)-headed row” than to start to check fromthe fourth character “(se)” in the same row, so that it is easier tofind out the desired character (the apparatus 1 has a higheroperability).

Similarly, a scroll rule for changing entry designation characters byoperating the up arrow key 33U is defined in a manner conforming to theprinciples or arrangement of each table (except for Hiragana letters andKatakana letters) such that when the up arrow key 33U is depressed, theentry designation character is changed from a letter at [i, j] to aletter at [i−1, j], while in the cases of Hiragana letters and Katakanaletters, as shown in FIG. 65, for instance, it is defined that the entrydesignation character is changed to a first letter in the immediatelypreceding (i−1) row.

Therefore, according to the scroll rule for changing entry designationcharacters of Hiragana and Katakana through operation of the down arrowkey 33D or the up arrow key 33U, it is defined that if the entrydesignation character is changed from one row to an adjacent one, then,a first character on the adjacent row in the Japanese syllabary isdesignated as a new entry designation character. Therefore, the entrydesignation character is changed in a manner conforming to theprinciples or arrangement of each table from a letter at [i, j] to aletter at [i+1, J] or to a letter at [i−1, j], only when the letter asthe entry designation character prior to a change corresponds to a firstletter in each row of the systematic table of the Japanese syllabary.

As described above, according to the character entry method applied tothe tape printing apparatus 1, while a character in an i-th row (irepresents a natural number) of a plurality of rows in the array tableis designated as an entry designation character, when the entrydesignation character is changed, a character in a k-th row (k=i−1, ork=i+1) as a preceding row or a next one is designated as a new entrydesignation character in accordance with the change.

That is, the array table is comprised of a plurality of rows and aplurality of columns formed into a two-dimensional arrangement. Theentry designation character can be changed not only in the direction ofa sequence of characters in each of the plurality of rows (in thedirection of the length of row) but also in the direction of the lengthof columns, so that it is possible to quickly designate, as the entrydesignation character, a character at a location remote from the presententry designation character in the array table, thereby enhancing theoperability of the device.

Further, there is sometimes a case where a k-th row to which the searchis shifted does not have a character in a j-th column corresponding inposition to the preceding entry designation character, so that thescroll rules are defined in a more generalized manner to cope with sucha case. According to the scroll rule of the character entry method,assuming that a desired j-th character in a desired i-th row is definedas a character at [i, j], to change the entry designation character to acharacter in the k-th row when the character at [i, j] is beingdesignated as the entry designation character, a character at [k, h](when the number of characters in the k-th row is smaller than thenumber j, h represents the number of the characters in the k-th row,whereas when the number of characters in the k-th row is equal to orlarger than the number j, h=j) is designated as a new entry designationcharacter in accordance with the change.

In this case, the entry designation character can be changed from thecharacter in the j-th column in the i-th row in the array table to thecharacter in the j-th column in k (i−1 or i+1)-th row. Further, whenthere is not a letter in the k-th row, corresponding to the character inthe j-th column, a letter at the end of the k-th row can be designatedas a new entry designation character, so that it is easy to expect acharacter to be displayed as the entry designation character immediatelyafter the position of an entry designation character is shifted to thek-th row. This makes it easy to know in advance characters as newcandidate characters for entry, thereby further enhancing theoperability of the device.

Further, according to the scroll rules of the character entry methodapplied to the tape printing apparatus 1, the first one of a pluralityof rows in the array table is handled as the row following the last row.This scroll rule is commonly applied irrespective of the kinds ofcharacters to be entered (that is, regardless of which array tableincluding those shown in FIGS. 68 to 74 is used in designating an entrydesignation character).

For instance, as shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, it is defined that the rowfollowing the “(wa)-headed row” as the last row (row corresponding toi=10) (in the systematic table of the Japanese syllabary) is defined tobe the “(a)-headed row” as the first row (initial row: row correspondingto i=10), and that the immediately preceding row of the “(a)-headed row”as the first row (row corresponding to i=10) is the “(wa)-headed row” asthe last row (row corresponding to i=10). This scroll rule is commonlyapplied irrespective of the kinds of characters. That is, since the rowsof the table can be handled as rows in a circular sequence, it becomeseasier to change an entry designation character in the direction of thelength of columns (scroll between rows), whereby the operability of thedevice can be further enhanced. Exceptions thereof will be describedhereinafter.

Next, a scroll rule for changing entry designation characters byoperating the shift/cursor key 33S will be described hereinafter. Thisscroll rule is commonly applied irrespective of the kinds of charactersto be entered (that is, regardless of which array table including thosein FIGS. 68 to 74 is used in designating an entry designation character)with the exception for changing entry designation characters of smallHiragana and Katakana letters.

Referring to FIG. 66, assuming that a letter in an i-th row isdesignated as the entry designation character, if the shift/right arrowkey 33RS is depressed, a character at the end of the i-th row isdesignated. However, when the present entry designation character is aletter at the end of the i-th row, a letter at the end of a next(i+1)-th row is designated as the new entry designation character.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67, assuming that a letter in an i-th row isdesignated as the entry designation character, if the shift/left arrowkey 33LS is depressed, a character at the head of the i-th row isdesignated. However, when the present entry designation character is aletter at the head of the i-th row, a letter at the head of theimmediately preceding (i−1)-th row is designated as the new entrydesignation character. Exceptions thereof ill be described hereinafter.

It should be noted that the apparatus 1 may be configured such that byoperating the shift/up arrow key 33US, a character at the head of theimmediately preceding (i−1)-th row is designated, or by shifting theshift/down arrow key 33DS, a character at the head of the next (i+1)-thline is designated. Further, a configuration can be contemplated inwhich by operating the shift/down arrow key 33DS, a character at the endof the next (i+1)-th line is designated or selected.

Characters at the head and end of each of a plurality of rows in thearray tables have the minimum and maximum values of the character codesof the row and tend to indicate features of the row. Therefore, byviewing a character at the head or end of each row, it is possible toeasily grasp the characteristics (range or features) of (the values ofcodes) of the characters in the row.

As described above, according to the character entry method applied tothe tape printing apparatus 1, assuming that character in an i-th row (irepresents a natural number) of a plurality of rows in an array table isdesignated as an entry designation character, the entry designationcharacter can be changed to a character in a k-th (k=i−1, or k=i+1) row(preceding row or next row). Further, the entry designation charactercan be changed to a character as the head or end of the k-th or i-throw, so that the user can readily know about a row where the position ofthe entry designation character is located immediately before orimmediately after a change in the entry designation character. Thisenables the user to quickly change the entry designation character,which enhances the operability of the apparatus 1.

Further, if the Hiragana letters or Katakana letters are thepredetermined kind of characters, the predetermined kind-of-characterarray table has a plurality of rows of characters arranged based on thesystematic table of the Japanese syllabary. That is, since the pluralityof rows are arranged based on the systematic table of the Japanesesyllabary, it is easier to find out a desired letter, which enhances theoperability of the apparatus 1.

Further, in the above case, small letters are included in thepredetermined kind of characters (Hiragana letters or Katakana letters),and assuming that a character at an i-th line is designated as the entrydesignation character, and the entry designation character is to bechanged to a small letter as a general rule, the entry designationcharacter can be changed to a large letter corresponding to the smallletter as an exception to such cases.

More specifically, as described hereinabove with reference to FIGS. 64,65 and 67, when a newly designated entry designation character after achange is positioned at the head of a row, if a character at the head ofeach row is a small character, a large or normal-size charactercorresponding to the small character is designated as the entrydesignation character instead of the small letter. That is, in place ofthe small Hiragana letters “” ([0401] DEC) of the “(a)-headed row”, “”([0467] DEC) of the “(ya)-headed row”, and “” ([0478] DEC) of the “”(wa)-headed row”, the large or nomal-sized letters “” ([0402] DEC), “”([0468] DEC) and “” ([0479] DEC) are designated as entry designationcharacters, respectively.

In general, differently from alphabetic characters, in the case ofHiragana or Katakana letters, large or normal-size letters are by farfrequently used than small letters, and hence even when a small letteris designated as the entry designation character, the probability of adesignated letter being a letter desired by the user is increased if alarge or normal-size letter is exceptionally designated as the entrydesignation character before designating the small letter. Therefore,when Hiragana or Katakana letters are input, large or normal-sizeletters are handled by giving priority thereto, whereby it is possibleto quickly find and designate a letter desired by the user, therebyenhancing the operability of the device.

As described above, according to the character entry method applied tothe tape printing apparatus 1, a plurality of candidate characters forentry are displayed on the display screen, and one of the candidatecharacters is designated as an entry designation character. Then, afterchanging the position of the entry designation character, if a characterdesired by the user is designated as the entry designation character,the character can be finally determined as the character to be entered,whereby the character desired by the user can be entered. That is, thecharacter entry method is basically of a type which displays candidatecharacters and one of the same is designated as a character for entry,requiring only a small number of keys.

Further, a predetermined kind-of-character array table is defined, inwhich a plurality of characters classified into a predetermined kind arecaused to correspond in position to the character codes thereof and thecharacters and their codes are arranged into a plurality of rows and aplurality of columns according to a predetermined rule, to thereby forma two-dimensional arrangement. In short, a predeterminedkind-of-character array table is defined, in which characters to beinput are caused to correspond to the codes thereof. This array table issimilar to a so-called character code table generally attached to acharacter entry device, and if attached to an actual device similarly tothe character code table, the user can refer to the array table.

On the other hand, according to the character entry method, a pluralityof characters corresponding to a plurality of character codes arrangedadjacent to each other in the array table are displayed on the displayscreen as candidate characters for entry. Since displayed characterscorresponding to the character codes arranged adjacent to each other inthe array table are displayed as the candidate characters, the user caneasily understand with reference to the array table to which directionhe is required to change the position of an entry designation characterso as to display a desired character.

Further, the code of the entry designation character is displayed on thedisplay screen together with a plurality of candidate charactersincluding the entry designation character, so that the user can easilyand quickly find out where the entry designation character designated atthe present time point is positioned in the array table with referenceto the displayed character code. That is, it is possible to find out, inthe array table, both the entry designation character designated at thepresent time point and a desired character, and hence the user can graspwith ease to which direction he is required to change the position of anentry designation character so as to display a desired character.

Further, after changing the entry designation character, a newlydesignated character and new candidate characters arranged adjacent tothe newly designated character are displayed, and a character codecorresponding to the newly designated character is displayed, so that ifthe direction of change in designation is correct, the result can beascertained in the array table, whereas if the direction of change indesignation is wrong, the result can be checked for correction of thechanging error.

In the above cases, it is only required to display at the minimum thepresent entry designation character as a candidate character, andaccordingly, it is sufficient if a character for entry (entrydesignation character) and characters adjacent to the character forentry can be displayed at the maximum (i.e. two characters in the caseof displaying one of characters immediately before and immediately afterthe character for entry in addition to the entry designation character,or three characters in the case of displaying both the charactersimmediately before and immediately after the character for entry inaddition to the same). In short, the operability of the device cannot bespoiled, even if the display screen is small in size. Therefore,according to the above character entry method, it is possible to inputcharacters by operating a small number of keys without spoiling theoperability of the device, even if the display screen is small in size.

It should be noted that predetermined kind-of-character array tablesused in the tape printing apparatus 1 are defined, as described abovewith reference to FIG. 61 and FIGS. 68 to 74, such that the maximumvalue of values indicated by the codes of characters on any one of aplurality of rows is smaller than the minimum value of values indicatedby the codes of characters on a next row. As a result, ranges of valuesindicated by the codes of characters on respective rows in each arraytable are prevented from being duplicated. Further, the character codesare sequentially arranged in ascending order, which makes it easy tofind out a desired number from the array table, and change the entrydesignation character to thereby display a desired character therefor.

That is, the user can easily and quickly grasp with reference to thearray table to which direction he is required to change the position ofan entry designation character to thereby display a desired characterfor the entry designation character. Moreover, if the direction ofchanging the designation is wrong, it is easy to view and correct theerror, and hence a desired character can be displayed quickly with ease.Therefore, it is possible to input characters by operating a smallnumber of keys without spoiling the operability of the device, even ifthe display screen is small in size.

It should be noted that in this embodiment, the array table may bedefined such that the minimum value of values indicated by the codes ofcharacters in any one of a plurality of rows exceeds the maximum valueof values indicated by the codes of characters in a next row. In thiscase as well, ranges of values indicated by the codes of characters onrespective rows in each array table are prevented from being duplicated.Further, the character codes are sequentially arranged in descendingorder, which makes it easy to find out a desired number from the arraytable, and change the entry designation character to display a desiredcharacter therefor.

That is, similarly to the case of the character codes being arranged inascending order, the user can easily and quickly grasp with reference tothe array table to which direction he is required to change the positionof an entry designation character to thereby display a desiredcharacter. Moreover, if the direction of changing the designation (i.e.the position of an entry designation character) is wrong, the error canbe corrected with ease, and a desired character for the entrydesignation character can be displayed quickly with ease. Therefore, itis possible to input characters by operating a small number of keyswithout spoiling the operability of the device, even if the displayscreen is small in size.

Further, in the above example, an entry designation character isdesignated by operating the cursor designating the position thereof, andhence it is possible to designate the entry designation characterthrough simple operations by using cursor keys of the general type.Further, the entry of a character is determined by operating the enterkey, so that it is possible to determine the entry through a simpleoperation by using the enter key of the general type.

According to the character entry method applied to the tape printingapparatus 1, one of a plurality of kinds of enterable charactersincluding a predetermined kind of characters is selected as a kind ofcharacters to be entered. When the selected kind of characters is thepredetermined kind of characters, characters of the predetermined kindare determined as candidate characters for entry. In this case, even ifa kind of characters except for the predetermined kind are included asone of the plurality of kinds of enterable characters, the predeterminedkind can be selected as a kind of characters to be entered. Therefore,this method can be applied to a character entry method and device whichare capable of entering various kinds of characters.

Further, in the tape printing apparatus 1, a character for entry is forediting a character string read out from a disc storing characterstrings. Therefore, the character entry method can be used for editingsuch a character string read out from a disc, e.g. by insertingcharacters into the character string read out. Furthermore, in the aboveexample, the disc is a mini disc, and hence the character entry methodcan be applied as a character entry method for editing a characterstring read out from a mini disc e.g. by inserting characters therein.

Character stings of the above-mentioned kind include a character stringindicating the titles of music pieces and a title stored in a disc or adisc title, so that the character entry method can be used as a methodfor editing a character string read out from a disc e.g. by insertingcharacters therein, more particularly, for adding artist's names aftermusic titles, changing character strings into ones which make it easyfor the user to grasp the contents of the music pieces, or addingdesired characters to character strings. For instance, when all themusic pieces stored in a disc are composed by the same artist or thereis a representative artist among the artists recorded in the disc, thecharacter entry method can be used to add the artist's name or changethe title after the name of the artist. Further, it is possible to forma desired label simply by printing a desired print image on a desiredlabel to thereafter peel off a half-die-cut portion defined by half diecutting.

Although in the above embodiment, a remotely controllable MD player isused, this is not limitative, but an MD playback function block similarto the MD player may be incorporated in the tape printing apparatus.Further, the invention can also be applied to other disc playbacksystems for use with other types of discs, such as a magneto-optical(MO) disc for mainly storing and reproducing music/voice signals as themain information, a rewritable CD (CD-R, etc.), and a DVD for mainlyrecording and reproducing movie data as the main information, so long asthey are capable of reading out main information and attributeinformation corresponding thereto.

Further, the print image is not necessarily required to be formed fromtext data of character strings read out from a disc. It is also possibleto apply the invention to printing apparatuses other than a tapeprinting apparatus, so long as they are of a kind with which the userdesires to print a print image on a predetermined area on a printingobject by moving the printing object and a print head having dotelements arranged thereon in a predetermined direction for printing,relative to each other in a direction orthogonal to the predetermineddirection.

It is further understood by those skilled in the art that the foregoingis a preferred embodiment of the invention, and that various changes andmodifications may be made without departing from the spirit and scopethereof.

What is claimed is:
 1. A method of printing a print image on a printingobject, by relatively moving at least one of said printing object and aprint head which has a plurality of dot elements arranged thereon in apredetermined direction each for printing one pixel dot and is capableof printing a predetermined maximum number of pixel dots in saidpredetermined direction, in a direction orthogonal to said predetermineddirection, the method comprising the steps of: setting an image having anumber of pixel dots in said predetermined direction smaller in numberthan said predetermined maximum number of pixel dots to said printimage; setting a range of use corresponding to a predetermined number ofpixel dots to said plurality of dot elements; adjusting a printingposition of said print image in units of one or more pixel dots, asrequired, by moving said range of use along said predetermineddirection; and printing said print image on a predetermined print areaon said printing object by using dot elements in said range of use ofsaid plurality of dot elements.
 2. A method according to claim 1,wherein said printing object is a tape.
 3. A method according to claim1, wherein said predetermined print area is a half-die-cut label formedin said printing object by half die cutting.
 4. A method according toclaim 3, wherein there are provided a plurality of kinds of labels assaid half-die-cut label, and wherein the step of adjusting said printingposition includes adjusting said printing position according to eachkind of said labels.
 5. A method according to claim 1, wherein the stepof adjusting said printing position includes designating said printingposition by an incremental or decremental number of pixel dots withreference to a predetermined reference position corresponding to areference number of pixel dots.
 6. A method according to claim 1,wherein said print image is formed by converting a character code ofeach character of a character string including at least one character toimage data based on a predetermined dot font, and arranging said imagedata in a predetermined memory area.
 7. A method according to claim 6,including the step of reading said character string from a disc storingsaid character string.
 8. A method according to claim 7, wherein saiddisc is a mini disc.
 9. An image printing device for printing a printimage on a printing object, comprising: a print head which has aplurality of dot elements arranged thereon in a predetermined directioneach for printing one pixel dot and is capable of printing apredetermined maximum number of pixel dots in said predetermineddirection; print image-setting means for setting an image having anumber of pixel dots in said predetermined direction smaller in numberthan said predetermined maximum number of pixel dots to said printimage; use range-setting means for setting a range of use correspondingto a predetermined number of pixel dots to said plurality of dotelements; printing position-adjusting means for adjusting a printingposition of said print image in units of one or more pixel dots, asrequired, by moving said range of use along said predetermineddirection; moving means for relatively moving at least one of said printhead and said printing object, in a direction orthogonal to saidpredetermined direction; and printing means for printing said printimage on a predetermined print area on said printing object by using dotelements in said range of use of said plurality of dot elements.
 10. Animage printing device according to claim 9, wherein said printing objectis a tape.
 11. An image printing device according to claim 9, whereinsaid predetermined print area is a half-die-cut label formed in saidprinting object by half die cutting.
 12. An image printing deviceaccording to claim 11, wherein there are provided a plurality of kindsof labels as said half-die-cut label, and wherein said printingposition-adjusting means adjusts said printing position according toeach kind of said labels.
 13. An image printing device according toclaim 9, wherein said printing position-adjusting means includes dotposition-designating means for designating said printing position by anincremental or decremental number of pixel dots with reference to apredetermined reference position corresponding to a reference number ofpixel dots.
 14. An image printing device according to claim 9, includingprint image-forming means for forming said print image by converting acharacter code of each character of a character string including atleast one character to image data based on a predetermined dot font, andarranging said image data in a predetermined memory area.
 15. An imageprinting device according to claim 14, further including reading meansfor reading said character string from a disc storing said characterstring.
 16. An image printing device according to claim 15, wherein saiddisc is a mini disc.
 17. An image printing device according to claim 15,wherein said reading means includes disc playback means for reading saidcharacter string from said disc.
 18. A character printing deviceaccording to claim 17, wherein said disc playback means is constructedsuch that said disc playback means receives a request signal generatedin response to a key operation of a remote controller from said remotecontroller, and transmits a portion of a character string to bedisplayed on a display of said remote controller to said remotecontroller, said portion corresponding to said request signal, andwherein said reading means further includes remote control communicationmeans for sending said request signal and receiving said portion of saidcharacter string in place of said remote controller.